Home

File - Performance Communications

1. Figure 50 BIX module Connector Designation strip Ll EJ Cor I l l 553 3097 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame Page 141 of 436 Figure 51 Recommended layout for NT8D37 IPE Modules Cable terminations for one NT8D37 IPE Module From ble A Lo Sabe panel Cable B Cable C Cable D Note Cable E Cable F Cable G Cable H Note Cable K Cable L Cable M Cable N Note Cable R Cable S Cable T Cable U Note Spare Spare Spare Spare Note In NT8D37DC IPE Modules these slots are not used Theyare used in NT8D37EC IPE Modules 553 3099 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 142 of 436 Planning and
2. oes testics das es es Jes cCNI ys Util CPPIV Card status LEDs Oa internal check 5 E O Compact Flash RMD PN Enbl Enb o ig V dis Dis LANT LAN2 Blank Faceplate us COM1 COM2 System Utility disable AA switch i LCD display ESET c9 c10c11 c12c13c14c15 CP Core shelf cabling This section describes installation of the internal Core cables see Figure 91 on page 223 Cables for Core to non Core modules are described in subsequent sections NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 221 of 436 Figure 90 Card placement in the NT4N41 Core Net Module Net Core g g p E i gt amp amp amp O CCNI TiL Pv 5 X 2 gis no sg B 2 Zj ale om 2 2 2 oO glo LA 8 Qa Q Q T g ose S 8 8 8 2 2 0 2 3 3 3 S 5 N 2 2 2 od a o 8 a a D a 2 3 3 3 93 S Qa a a a ira al 3 E a X z z z z Z oj o PS O 1 P 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 c9 c10c11c12c13c14c15 CP 553 9123r26revised Required Core cables Table 28 on page 221 lists field installed cables Cables in
3. 12 lano leno O veco H h aaa Cali Ja NT8D99AD cable o other E Core Net D NT8D99AD cable 21 ceas 553 9473 End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Optioning the System Utility Card Page 207 of 436 To install the system utility card first identify Core Net 0 and Core Net 1 shelves Then adjust the DIP switches according to Table 25 Table 25 System Utility Card DIP switch settings Core Net 0 Core Net 1 DIP switch 1 on off DIP switch 2 on on Figure 84 on page 207 shows Core card front side placement If the Core cards are not installed see Figure 84 to add or replace cards Figure 84 Core side of Core Net module Card status LEDs System Utility disable Core O internal check PrU cCNI Sys Util CPPN Os O a Enb q Enb iy o Dis Dis Lan Ous cow come A Y Yy ser c9 c10c11c12c13c14c15 CP Compact Flash RMD Blank Faceplate LCD displ
4. Group 2 shelf 0 Network shelf loops 64 to 79 Group 3 shelf 0 Group 4 shelf 0 Group 5 shelf 0 Group 6 shelf 0 Group 7 shelf 0 loops 96 to 143 loops 128 to 143 loops 160 to 175 loops 192 to 207 loops 224 to 239 Hi Core 0 Applications IPE IPE IPE IPE Engineering rules Each system is defined using the following assumptions and general engineering rules 1 A system may be upgraded to the next larger system type as defined in Communication Server 1000M and Meridian I Large System Upgrade NTPs NN43021 458 to 474 When expanding to the next system type the changes to the physical configuration should be kept as simple as possible to reduce downtime and installation costs A module column should be built up to the maximum of four modules before moving to the next new column In installations where the ceiling does not allow four high columns the alternate configuration of three high tiers can be used Vertical routing of the internal signal cables should be done only on the right side of a module The CPU modules must be on the bottom of a column or one level up for proper cooling and reliability Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 58 of 436 Preparing for installation 6 Sending and receiving cables must be of equal lengths and as short as possible
5. J25 on I O panel Terminal lt Fr Core Net 1 Core Net 0 NT8D95 Rear View 553 A0133 Connecting a switch box and terminal to COM1 and COM2 ports Use Procedure 19 to connect COM ports to a switch box and a terminal see Figure 71 on page 180 Procedure 19 Connecting a switch box and terminal to COM1 and COM2 ports 1 Set the terminal to 9600 baud 7 data space parity one stop bit full duplex XON Connect an NT8D95 cable to the terminal and to the switch box Connect NT8D95 cables to a matching connector on the switch box When using an A0377992 ABCDE box connect CPU 0 to connector A CPU 1 to connector B Connect the NT8D95 cables from the switch box to J25 on the I O panel in the rear of the cPCI Core Network Modules Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 180 of 436 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 Connecting a system terminal or modem 5 To communicate directly with a COM1 port switch the cable as needed The terminal connected to the SDI port will always communicate with whichever CPU is active End of Procedure Figure 71 One terminal and a switch box to two COM1 ports Terminal D gt lt a lt q NT8D95 cable D gt al Kai Network Module NT8
6. Modem cable RS 232 or NT8D46 cable Remote terminal TE gt lt q SDI port Public phone I O panel network 1 O panel _ Core Net 1 Core Net 0 NT8D95 Switch box Modem cable NT8D bi or NT8D46 Bee caD Se Dumb mode modem 553 A0138 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 191 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics CODING PINGCINGS errre arire dukis an Raweo RI eee MARR o RES 191 Cores Net module isi 5 pone eee d edie bPeiw Keren biaeeE Tees 193 Cabling ihe Cope gue 652i o kes ticea heee gi eeegiveen stead Lae 197 Cabline the MO Panels coicnccoieking bei inini Re eka RE ERER 199 Cabling the NetWork side 2 0022 cri ee dene hbo te ed ir rrtt es 201 Configuring and cabling the Clock Controllers 202 Network Grotip 0 Shelf 0 to Shelf Losos isc aeee gees we cade nae we 203 Connecting the 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules 203 Inspecting CNI to 3PE factory installed cables 204 Connecting the Core Net backplanes 0 22 00cc 082seeeree asses 206 Optioning the System Utility Card co 2ca0csse00504048040eena0 207 Connecting Core modules to a LAN 2 ccc00c0etenerenkacenes 208 Cabling guidelines The NT4N41 Core Net module backplane see Figure 76 on page 193 like al
7. To activate power fail transfer Closed when activated Additional attendant consoles 50220 07 Power Supply Attendant console Meridian 1 master system monitor SM LFBENR To LFBEN leads on slave SM s REMALMB To power supply above To REMALM leads on slave system monitors Closed on MJ alarm Closed on MJ alarm 553 7559 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 152 of 436 Installing Power Failure Transfer Units Installing a PFTU Use the following procedure and any instructions provided with the Power Failure Transfer Unit PFTU to install and connect PFTUs Procedure 13 Installing a PFTU 1 Install a PFTU according to the manufacturer s instructions 2 Attach the yellow PFTU label to the designation strip indicating the top connector as P1 and the bottom connector as P2 3 Install two NE A25B type 25 pair cables from connectors P1 and P2 on the front of the PFTU to the PFTU termination area at the MDF 4 Cross connect wiring for PFTU operation as shown in Table 6 Table 6 MDF cross connections for PFTU operations Description Connection 48 V DC PFTU connector P1 pin 49 return GND PFTU connector P2 pin 49 and MDF GND All grounds on system monitor cable MDF GND Console cable pin 11 PFTU connector P1 pin 25 Console cable pin 36 MDF GND LFBEN line forced bypass enable PFTU connector P1 pin 50
8. 553 5885 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 366 of 436 Adding a module to a column 9 Connect the orange power connector to the module power harness Restore power to the module e With AC power set the main circuit breaker to ON up in the rear of the pedestal e With DC power set the circuit breaker in the rear of the pedestal and then set the module power supply to ON up for the module that was added 10 Reinstall the system monitor in the pedestal a Reconnect the RJ11 cable to J6 then the cable to J3 Reinstall the system monitor b If the column houses the master system monitor load LD 37 and software re enable the associated SDI port LD 37 ENL TTY x enable the device associated with the port eet exit LD 37 11 Replace all module covers and the pedestal grill End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 367 of 436 Cabling network modules and loops Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Network to network cabling 0 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 367 Network module cOnmeChONS sins 45S 5o0 S24 ee so AeRe Reba Leen 368 Network Group 0 Shelf 0 to Shelf lis ceive esac nerseeevaveeswes 368 Connecting the 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules 368 Connecting the Core Net backplanes so4s65css0ieiecieaa ein us 369 Connecting Groups 1 through 7 Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 370 Connecting the Network modules to th
9. 409 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 List of Procedures Page 23 of 436 Procedure 75 Connecting an IBM COTS server 200068 412 Procedure 76 Connecting an HP COTS server 22 0005 413 Procedure 77 Connecting a Dell COTS server 2 05 415 Procedure 78 Verifying the presence of an NRS 419 Procedure 79 Upgrading the CP PM BIOS with the CS 1000 Linux Base installer s cc44 ce 25h06 eens eee eee es 422 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 24 of 436 List of Procedures NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 25 of 436 Customer service Visit the Avaya Web site to access the complete range of services and support that Avaya provides Go to www avaya com or go to one of the pages listed in the following sections Navigation e Getting technical documentation on page 25 e Getting product training on page 25 e Getting help from a distributor or reseller on page 26 e Getting technical support from the Avaya Web site on page 26 Getting technical documentation To download and print selected technical publications and release notes directly from the Internet go to www avaya com suppott Getting product training Ongoing product training is available For more information or to register you can access the Web site at www avaya com support From this Web site you can locate the Training contacts link on the left hand navi
10. COT Pins S T7 40 Slot 13 R7 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 Slot 10 Slot 14 19 45 20 46 Slot 10 Slot 14 21 47 22 48 Slot 10 Slot 14 23 49 24 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 267 of 436 Table 45 NT5K18 Flexible Central Office Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors C G M T Part 1 of 2 Lead designations I O panel connectors COT Pins G M Slot 10 Slot 14 Slot 10 Slot 14 Slot 10 Slot 14 Slot 11 Slot 15 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 268 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 45 NT5K18 Flexible Central Office Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors C G M T Part 2 of 2 Lead designations I O panel connectors COT Pins G M T3 40 Slot 11 Slot 15 R3 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 Slot 11 Slot 15 19 45 20 46 Slot 11 Slot 15 21 47 22 48 Slot 11 Slot 15 23 49 24 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 269 of 436 Table 46 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M 2 Wire Type 1 connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors A E K R I O panel connectors E K Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 12 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 270 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 47 NT5K19 E amp M 2 Wire Type 1 connections for NT8D37 I O panel connec
11. FIJI card cabling Fiber Network is enabled by the installation of one NTRB33 Fiber Junctor Interface FIJI card in each Core Net or Network module see Figure 96 on page 233 and Figure 97 on page 234 Double slot FIJI NTRB33AF cards require two slots and install in slots 2 and 3 of each Network module or in slots 8 and 9 of each Core Net module Single slot FIJI NTRB33BBE5 cards require one slot and install in slot 2 of each Network module or in slot 9 of each Core Net module The LCD display shows the Network group and shelf If an error occurs an Alarm code appears in this window Class 1 LED Device DANGER The fiber optic interface product used in the Large System is considered safe However as a precaution do not view the optical port or the end of fiber optic cable Under certain conditions such as during cable testing or under light magnification the cable or port can expose the eye beyond the limits of Maximum Permissible Exposure recommended in some jurisdictions Do not remove protective caps or plugs until ready to connect the cable NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 233 of 436 Figure 96 Double slot FIJI card faceplate Latch LCD Display ENB DIS Switch LEDs TX Port J1 RX Port J2 Js Serial Port J4 Latch 553 8649 Large System Installation and C
12. NT8D04 2 NT8DO1AC is a controller 4 NT8DO1AD is a controller 2 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 NT8DO1AC 1 Cabling network modules and loops Page 383 of 436 Figure 137 NT8D04 Superloop Network Card network loops connectors for single row connections Superloop network card faceplate connectors Use NT8D91 cables NT8D01 Controller Card backplane connectors OUD z ce N Controller DB MBu L Visible part of the backplane Note 1 The NT8D04 Superloop Network Card may be located in any acceptable slot in an NT4N41 Core Network Module or NT8D35 Network Module Note 2 On superloop network cards connector J1 is used for odd numbered shelves connector J2 is used for even numbered shelves 553 5237 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 384 of 436 Cabling network modules and loops Cabling a Superloop Network Card multiple columns If the system is configured as a single column Basic cabling for single row network connections on page 380 CAUTION Service Interruption System Failure Due to the possibility of EMI RFI noise do not route cables from front to rear next to the power supply unit Procedure 72 Basic cabling for multiple row network connections 1 Refer to the work order and the cabling layout shipped with the system to determine e Each loop number assigned e The module and slot assignments of the NT8D04 Supe
13. Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 226 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Figure 93 I O panel connections Core shelf front of module O Panel rear of module O J23 J22 J21J200 il il J27 J26 NTRE40AA o Ethernet vee ie i 28 cCNI Ox mi Oe an J31 6 c9 c10c11c12c13c14 NTRC17BA core to core NT4N88BA modem NT4NQOBA LAN switch NT4N88AA terminal 553 9466 End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 227 of 436 Connecting the Core module to a LAN Connect each Core Net module to a local area network LAN This connection provides a communication channel for LAN based systems management tools such as Element Manager This connection also supplies additional redundancy capabilities See Figure 94 on page 228 Note 1 If a LAN is not available connect the second NTRC17BA crossover Ethernet cable included in the basic package between the J31 ports in Core Net 0 and Core Net 1 Note 2 The Core Net I O panel cables must be installed as described on Installing the CP PIV to I O panel cables on page 224 before the Ethernet connections can be completed Procedur
14. Low float Twist red white and green together and connect to port 2 as Major Jumper together and connect to battery return bus J8 2 5 8 Configuring the alarm ports NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 Follow the steps in Procedure 17 to configure the alarm ports March 2013 Configuring the system monitor Page 173 of 436 Procedure 17 Configuring the alarm ports 1 Select Alarm Severity and Output from the System Manager display screen 2 Under Alarm Name select the line with AC Fail and change Output Port to 1 3 Under Alarm Name select the line with Major and change Output Port to 2 by default it should already be 2 4 Under Alarm Name select the line with Low Float and change Output Port to Port 3 5 All other Output Ports should be set to None Note For more information see the Alarms section in the Candeo Power System User Guide P0914425 End of Procedure Customizing alarms Under Alarm Severity and Outputs the ports and severity can be configured per customers requirements If the customer wishes they can utilize signals DCON1 DCON2 and DCON3 by connecting them to other available No Connect ports connect commons on J8 to the battery return bus and customize as desired Under the alarm output screen the relay state is defaulted to not energized when alarm is on To change the relay state an engineering
15. NTRB53 Clock Controller c PS o a PS o a NT8D80AZ cable 553 9123_3pe_r26revised End of Procedure Connecting the Core Net backplanes In Group 0 only the Shelf 0 and Shelf 1 backplanes must be connected with two NT8D99AD cables Core Net modules only Procedure 67 Connecting the Core Net backplanes 1 Connect one NT8D99AD cable from the E port in Core Net 0 to the E port in Core Net 1 2 Connect a second NT8D99AD cable from the D port in Core Net 0 to the D port in Core Net 1 See Figure 130 on page 370 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 370 of 436 Cabling network modules and loops Figure 130 Network Group 0 Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 backplane connections NT4N89 cable Network backplane Core backplane System Monitor XSM connections oup7 Group6 Group5 Group4 Group3 Group2 Group1 Gre i3 3 ot 12 b 12 E 11 E u b 10f fsotiof siot9 port1 b E E b porto porti i g 8 a a ia slot 12 J slot12 Jsiot11 Jsiot11 fsiotiof siot10 sioto i g 8 a a port1 NT4N29 cable Group 0 NT4N29 cable 553 9473 NT8D99AD cable NT8D99AD cable To other E Core Net D End of Procedure Connecting Groups 1 through 7 Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 On the back of each Netwo
16. Positioning guides Opening for cables 553 3056 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Adding a module to a column Page 357 of 436 Connect the power and system monitor cables between modules a Connect the power connectors between the module being added and the modules above and below it Connect the system monitor cable from connector J2 in the module below to J1 in the module being added review Figure 117 on page 353 Connect the system monitor cable from J2 in the module being added to J1 in the module above Restore power to the module With AC power set the main circuit breaker to ON up in the rear of the pedestal With DC power set the circuit breaker in the rear of the pedestal then the module power supply to ON up for the module that was added and for any module that was moved Reinstall the system monitor in the pedestal a Reconnect the RJ11 cable to J6 then the cable to J3 Reinstall the system monitor If the column houses the master system monitor load LD 37 and software re enable the associated SDI port LD 37 ENL TTY x enable the device associated with the port ee exit LD 37 Replace all module covers and the pedestal grill End of Procedure Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 358 of 436 Adding a module to a column Adding a module to the top of a column In a DC powered system power to the column can remain on during this procedure
17. In order to optimize network FIJI cabling mount the NTD35 network modules in pairs in the same column one module on top of the other in the middle tiers The modules must be stacked in one contiguous equipment bay The longest FIJI cable NTRC48FA is 8 m 26 ft which is the maximum distance of the furthest network module from the Core Net modules The IPE modules can be located separately from the CPU and network bay by up to the maximum network cable length of 13 5 m 45 ft Core network modules can also be on top of each other in the first and second tier in multi group systems Cable routing guidelines A system layout preconfigured at the factory is included in the software box with each system shipment Before you route cables see the to from cable connections in the system layout Note that there are a variety of cable lengths Make sure you install the designated cable for each connection Because the cable troughs see Figure 13 on page 59 and spaces on the sides of each module are within the EMI shielding of the system unshielded cables can be routed in those areas The corner vertical channels in the rear of the module are outside of the EMI shield Cables routed in the vertical channels must be shielded and must enter and exit the EMI shielded area through I O panels and adapters NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Preparing for installation Page 59 of 436 Figure 13 Cable routing troughs front view
18. Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 114 of 436 Installing DC power To eliminate potential of system problems and ensure the best grounding method possible is used obtain the services of a certified power contractor or auditor prior to system installation or cutover Note For a more information about approved ground sources and methods see Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering NN43021 220 You must use Insulated ground wire for system grounding Cabling and connecting the grounding leads This section covers cabling and connecting the grounding leads for the Candeo power system The Candeo s two grounding leads are e the frame or safety ground leads for the frames e the battery return reference ground lead for the system CAUTION Follow local requirements and electrical code The grounding methods described in this section are generic Specific local provincial state or federal electrical codes and grounding requirements as well as specific Customer or communication equipment requirements shall prevail CAUTION Maintain the integrity of the frame or safety ground The frame or safety ground shall not be confused with the reference ground lead nor with the battery return leads The frame or safety ground shall be wired in such a way as not to be carrying any AC or DC current at any time NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 115
19. Unpack or handle cards away from electric motors transformers or similar machinery Handle cards by the edges only Do not touch the contacts or components Set cards on a protective antistatic bag If an antistatic bag is not available hand hold the card or set it in a card cage unseated from the connectors Store cards in protective packing Do not stack cards on top of each other unless they are packaged Wear a properly connected antistatic wrist strap when you work on the equipment If a wrist strap is not available regularly touch one of the bare metal strips in the module to discharge static Figure 17 on page 64 shows the wrist strap connection points and the location of the bare metal strips you should touch Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 64 of 436 Preparing for installation Figure 17 Static discharge points Wrist strap connection point Power supply slot Module rear Bare metal strip Wrist strap connection point Module front Bare metal strip 553 5000 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Preparing for installation DenAn regulatory notice for Japan BRAHE BELOCER ARRAS LE LOTERISUFO FUAAROMRRAEO WM CHY RRA BAXLEFAAODLOCT e Communication Server 1000M Cabinet Chassis e Communication Server 1000S e Communication Server 1000E e Meridian 1 Option 11C e Meridian 1 Option 11C Mini e Media Gateway 1000 e Multimedi
20. maximum Maximum total output is 150 A A Power alarm cable NT8D46AV TB1 in Power distribution unit To CB4 blower CBO module 0 amp CB1 module 1 To connections To CB2 module 2 in pedestal amp CB3 module 3 re Red wires Note Optional four feed wiring shown 553 AAA1513 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 136 of 436 Installing DC power NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 137 of 436 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics ADOUE TCU ONONG ea e ierant eE ROETE ASE aE wade 137 Installation and designation i c40 s 0sescenesie ees ansens 137 Terminal bl ck requirements ci ciccdseeciseadieeansbuag ieee 138 Installing the BIX cross connect terminal 4 138 Installing the Krone cross connect system UK 142 About terminations All Large System terminations are cross connected on frame mounted or wall mounted modules and connecting blocks The layout of the blocks can vary to meet the requirements of the site DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Tip ring A B E M ESC and ESCG connections can be considered to be Telecommunication Network Voltages TNV Installation and designation Use the manufacturer s documentation for recommendations and detailed procedures on installing and labelling the cross con
21. on page 69 Position and level equipment go to Positioning and leveling equipment on page 75 Note If earthquake bracing is required go to Installing earthquake bracing on page 327 The section will provide procedures for installing column and floor bracing and positioning and levelling equipment When those procedures are complete return to Step 4 or Step 5 as applicable in this summary Install overhead cable tray kits if required go to Installing overhead cable tray kits on page 81 Install power supplies in all modules Make sure the system is disconnected from any power source b Set switches and breakers on all module power supplies or module power distribution units MPDU to OFF c Insert each power supply into the appropriate card cage and hook the locking devices Install a NT4N39AA CP PIV Processor Pack and blank faceplate N0026096 to cover MMDU slot Install power equipment and ground wiring For AC powered systems go to Installing AC power on page 85 For DC powered systems go to Installing DC power on page 97 Plan and designate the main distribution frame MDF go to Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame on page 137 Install Power Failure Transfer Units PFTU if required go to Installing Power Failure Transfer Units on page 149 Configure the system monitor go to Configuring the system monitor on page 155 Large System Inst
22. 3 Configure the option switches for each system monitor For more information about switch setting options see Circuit Card Reference NN43001 311 a Fora single column system configure the switches as shown in Table 7 Note Connect and cable the system monitor in a single column system like a master system monitor for the rest of this procedure Table 7 NT8D22 switch settings for a single column system Switch Set to on for a DC powered system set to off for an AC powered system Set to off if the system is not equipped with a PFTU b Fora multiple column system configure the system monitor in the column with CPU 0 as the master using the settings shown in Table 8 and Table 10 on page 158 c Configure option switches on slave system monitors as shown in Table 9 on page 158 and Table 11 on page 160 If CPU 0 and CPU 1 are in different columns configure the system monitor in the column Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 158 of 436 Configuring the system monitor with CPU 1 as slave unit 1 Number the slaves sequentially wherever possible Table 8 Switch settings for master in multiple column system Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 To a or ae positions 3 8 see Table 10 Se to on for a DC powered system set to off for an AC powered system Set to off if the system is not equipped with a PFTU Table 9 Switch settings for slaves in multiple column system To Se positions 3 8 see Table 11 on aa ae NE
23. After the Signaling Server is upgraded use NRS Manager to restore the NRS database from your local PC and activate it for use by the NRS For instructions on backing up and restoring an NRS database see Avaya Network Routing Service Fundamentals NN43001 130 For instructions on backing up and restoring the IP Phone database see Avaya Signaling Server IP Line Applications Fundamentals NN3001 125 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 419 of 436 Procedure 78 Verifying the presence of an NRS 1 Open Internet Explorer 2 Enter the ELAN or TLAN network interface IP Address of the primary Signaling Server as the URL Note Note Do not assign the same IP address for the Node ID and the TLAN network interface IP address This must be verified manually The Node IP address must be on the same subnet as the TLAN network interface IP addresses of the Media Cards In addition the TLAN and ELAN network interfaces of the Media Card must reside on separate logical subnets If additional configuration parameters were entered during installation the node IP address can also be used as the URL The Element Manager logon web page appears Figure 159 Element Manager logon page Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 420 of 436 Figure 160 Element manager Home System Overview AVAYA UCM Network Services Home Links Virtual Terminals System Alarms Maintenanc
24. DCE cable from COM 2 NT4N88BA for modem NT4N29 3PE Cables to Net module factory installed PS slot c9 Sys Util slot c15 cONI NT8D17 Conference TDS NT8D04 Superloop Network Card NT8D04 Superloop Network Card NT8D04 Superloop Network Card QPC43R Peripheral Signaling Card QPC441 3 Port Extender Card FIJIGS DIGS Card _______ to other Core Net ______ESS LAN 2 port LAN 2 cable NTRC17BA 553 9059 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 224 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Figure 92 CP PIV Core and Network backplanes NT4N89 cable Network backplane Core backplane Ho OE System Monitor L XSM connections al NT4N29 cable j3slot 9 port 0 j4slot 9 port 0 Group 0 NT4N29 cable 553 9473 Installing the CP PIV to I O panel cables Connect the cables from the CP PIV card faceplate to the I O panel on the back of the Core Net modules e COMI is used to connect a terminal e COM2 is used to connect a modem e LAN lis used to connect the system to a LAN switch e LAN 2 is used to connect Core 0 to Core 1 for system redundancy Note If there is no LAN LAN 1 and LAN 2 are connected from Core 0 to Core 1 This connection is made o
25. In addition modules that house application specific equipment can be included in a column Columns are grouped in rows A system can have one column or multiple columns attached in rows Column 0 is always the column containing the Core Net 0 module Column is placed to the left of Column 0 and must contain the Core Net 1 module Column 0 and Column 1 are placed at the far left of the row front view Column numbering then continues to the right of Core 0 see Figure 3 on page 45 Additional rows are configured with the lowest numbered column on the far left and the highest numbered column on the far right front view For compliance with electromagnetic interference radio frequency interference EMI RFI standards spacer kits are provided to interconnect the columns in a multiple column system NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Preparing for installation Page 45 of 436 Figure 3 Example of Large System column row Front View gy yf O SS ESS m JE f UEM 0 UEM 0 Core Net 1 Core Net 0 Column 1 Column O Column 2 Column 3 553 A0140 UEMs are identified by function Each UEM contains a specialized set of equipment to digitalize process and route phone calls and voice messages see Figure 4 on page 46 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 46 of 436 Figure 4 Preparing for installation UEMs identified by functi
26. J1 a Tx J1 a Rx J2 F Rx wa Rx wale J3 sji ssj y saji gt J4 saij Group 0 shelf 1 Group 0 shelf 0 Tx w p A Tx J1 Rx J2 A Rx wal sji J3 j saii J4 fl NTRC48xx fiber optic cable 553 9112 End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 239 of 436 FIJI to FIJI cabling The FIJI cards in Shelf 0 and Shelf 1 of each Network group except Group 0 must be directly connected with a NTRC47AA FIJI to FIJI Synch Cable cable Procedure 36 Connecting the FIJI to FIJI cables 1 Connect a NTRC47AA cable from J4 to J4 of the FIJI cards in each Network group except Group 0 Figure 101 on page 239 2 Do NOT connect a cable in Group 0 The FIJI to FIJI connection in Group 0 is made as part of the Clock Controller connections described on page 240 Figure 101 FIJI Shelf 0 to FIJI Shelf 1 connections Group 1 shelf 1 Group 2 shelf 1 Group 3 shelf 1 Tx 1 Tx J1 Px wa Rx J2 E Group 0 shelf 1 Group 0 shelf 0 Tx J1 FS Tx J1 55 Rx aE Rx wla sii ssf J4 i J4 f TRC47AA cable 553 9113 End of Procedure Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 240 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Connecting the Clock Controller cables Two Clock Controller cards are required in each system
27. NT4N49AA PDU FLTR PWR DIST UNIT ASSY _ e EACH INPUT CIRCUIT MUST BE PROVIDED WITH A LISTED FUSE OR CIRCUIT BREAKER SUITABLE FOR BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION RATED 30A CB2 CB3 553 8997 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 126 of 436 Installing DC power With the NT4N49AA PDU the safety ground protective earth wires and all wiring to the terminal block in the PDU must be neatly routed within the cable tie saddles and under the cable restraint bar at the base of the pedestal see Figure 45 on page 126 This ensures that there is room to install the PDU cover safety cover and rear grill Conduit is not required with the NT4N49AA PDU However 32 mm 1 1 4 in or 20 mm 3 4 in conduit can be used if local codes or individual installations require it Conduit can be routed down through the column from overhead racks or up through the floor Conduit clamps and the hardware to fasten the conduit are provided in the pedestal If the NT7D0902 Rear Mount Conduit Kit is used conduit can enter from the rear of the column above the floor Figure 45 Cable routing in the rear of the pedestal NT4N49AA PDU C N YQ Q NT4N49AA 2 Oa O
28. P069985 Top Cap Cable Egress Panel 81 pair termination tables 250 PDU power distribution unit 98 equipment layout 125 power to 129 safety ground 126 system monitor cabling 161 PE Peripheral Equipment trunk pair termination tables 251 PE Peripheral Equipment modules line pair termination tables 251 pedestals 42 grills 67 module additions 349 350 power 122 PFTU power fail transfer unit 149 acceptance tests 325 alarm connections 150 system monitor cabling 165 trunk and telephone connections 153 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 434 of 436 Index positioning earthquake bracing 341 equipment 75 positioning guides fourth modules 70 module additions 356 362 power cables fourth modules 72 module additions 352 353 355 363 364 power cords 90 power systems 63 97 power up preparations 283 PWR messages in acceptance tests module power supply 320 R ramps 62 receptacles 85 ringing generators acceptance tests 320 rod installation earthquake bracing 335 339 RS 232 cable modem cabling 185 187 S safety ground protective earth AC power 86 90 DC power 113 127 SDI serial data interface ports modem connections 183 185 187 189 190 system monitor interface 157 162 system terminal connections 175 seismic anchor kits 329 330 seismic bracing kits 329 Signaling Server 49 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 single co
29. Power failure transfer control The system monitor can be cabled to the MDF to provide power failure transfer control or additional alarms The cable used is the NT8D46BH EH or DH and it is plugged into J3 on the system monitor With the same J3 connector the system monitor can be used with a variety of cables AC power control The system monitor can also monitor and control an AC powered UPS Connector J4 is used for this interface Three cables are available for connecting to a UPS NT8D46AQ NT8D46AJ and NT8D46AU DC power observation The system monitor can also work with DC power supplies A J4 connector monitors the rectifiers Cable requirements depend on the battery distribution box in use With the Candeo power system a NT8D46xx cable interfaces from the connector J4 of the Large System s system monitor to the Candeo s System Manager alarm output ports See Alarm interfacing to Candeo on page 169 for additional information NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Configuring the system monitor Page 157 of 436 Configuring the System Monitor The master System Monitor NT8D22 interfaces with a Serial Data Interface SDD port in the column with CPU 0 Procedure 15 Configuring the System Monitor NT8D22 1 Set the baud rate for the SDI port associated with the system monitor to 1200 baud in DTE mode 2 Inthe rear of the pedestal loosen the two retaining screws on the system monitor and remove it from the PDU
30. Standard 06 01 This screen identifies the components of your CS 1000 system 4 Click the symbol in front of the Signaling Server component March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 421 of 436 The Signaling Server component expands to display the properties of the Signaling Server see Figure 161 on page 421 Figure 161 Signaling Server properties Signaling Server Host Name CS1000E_PI Type ISP1100 H323 ID CS1000E_PI Software version sse 4 91 06 Role Leader Element Manager Equipped Line TPS UNIStim Cquipped IP Peer Gateway Virtual Trunk TPS Equipped SIP Proxy Redirect Server Enabled SIP Gateway Enabled Gatekeeper configuration Primary 5 View the contents of the Gatekeeper configuration property If the Gatekeeper configuration property indicates Primary as is the case here Alternate or Failsafe the Signaling Server hosts an NRS If the property indicates nothing the Signaling Server does not host an NRS End of Procedure Before you begin Before upgrading the software you must do the following e Connect the Signaling Server For details see Connections on page 408 or refer to Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 e Take a precautionary backup of the IP Phones application database e Take a precautionary backup of the NRS database Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 422 of 436 Installing a Signaling
31. at least one modem which can be set to smart mode one terminal and one RS 232 cable are required in all modem configurations Required and recommended specifications for local end modems are 1 4 5 Required true not buffered 9600 baud support required for remote Avaya technical support Required CCITT V 32 or V 32bis compliance Recommended the ability to adjust to lower and higher speeds depending on line quality while maintaining 9600 baud at local DTE Recommended V 42 error correction Recommended V 42bis data compression A dispatch or call back modem normally connected to the SDI port can be used if it meets the requirements To use a dispatch or call back modem that does not meet the requirements the modem must be used with a modem that meets specifications Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 184 of 436 Connecting a system terminal or modem Configuring a modem Use Procedure 21 to configure the modem You must configure the modem before you connect it to the Large System A terminal such as a PC computer is required to configure the modem Procedure 21 Configuring a modem 1 2 Turn the modem off Configure the modem DIP switches as follows e DIP switches 1 3 7 and 8 to ON down e DIP switches 2 4 5 and 6 to OFF up Connect an RS 232 cable to the modem and to a terminal Configure the terminal with the following values e 9600 baud e 8bits e 1 stop bit e no
32. requirements and converging a data network with VoIP see Converging the Data Network with VoIP NN43001 260 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 42 of 436 Preparing for installation Before system equipment is delivered to the installation site you must consider these requirements e Fire protection and safety requirements e Equipment room requirements e Grounding and power requirements e Cable requirements Specifications for these requirements and for developing the equipment room floor plan are in Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering NN43021 220 System equipment UEMs Universal Equipment Modules UEM are the building blocks of the communication system UEMs are generic metal frames equipped with covers Each UEM is a self contained unit with power a card cage I O panels and cable routing channels Each UEM houses sets of equipment used in system operations see Figure 2 on page 43 UEMs are stacked in columns UEMs are stacked in columns up to four modules high Within a column the levels are referred to as tiers The UEMs are numbered 0 to 3 from the bottom up see Figure 2 on page 43 Cables connect cards in the same module between two modules and between cards and the I O panel in the same module Column components Each column contains a pedestal base a top cap and up to four modules Pedestals Each column sits on a pedestal The pedestal cont
33. 0 fiber optic ring ascending 1 Start with the Tx J1 port in Group 0 Shelf 0 2 Connect a NTRC48xx FIJI Fiber Ring Cable of the appropriate length from the Tx J1 port of the FIJI card in Group 0 Shelf 0 to the Rx J2 port of the FIJI card in Group 1 Shelf 0 3 Connect a NTRC48xx FIJI Fiber Ring Cable of the appropriate length from the Tx J1 port of the FIJI card in Group 1 Shelf 0 to the Rx J2 port of the FIJI card in Group 2 Shelf 0 4 Continue to connect NTRC48xx FIJI Fiber Ring Cables of the appropriate length from the Tx J1 port to the Rx J2 port in Shelf 0 of each Network group Connect these cables in ascending order of Network groups 5 To complete the ring connect a final cable from the Tx J1 port in the highest number group back to the Rx J2 port in Group 0 Shelf 0 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 237 of 436 Figure 99 Shelf 0 fiber optic ring on a 4 group machine Shelf 0 fiber optic ring Group 1 shelf 1 Group 2 shelf 1 Group 3 shelf 1 Tx J1 E Tx J1 ks Rx J2 Rx J2 Rx J2 t 6 J3 l J4 Group 1 shelf 0 Group 2 shelf 0 Tx 1 E Gy NTRC48xx fiber optic cable 553 9122 End of Procedure Installing the Shelf 1 fiber optic ring descending To create the Shelf 1 fiber optic loop connect the FIJI
34. 04 This document is up issued to include updates to the Installing a Signaling Server chapter Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 14 of 436 November 2011 May 2011 November 2010 June 2010 June 2010 June 2009 May 2009 May 2009 December 2007 July 2007 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 New in this release Standard 05 03 This document is up issued to remove legacy feature and hardware content that is no longer applicable to or supported by Communication Server 1000 systems Standard 05 02 This document is up issued to include updates to the Cabling lines and trunks chapter Standard 05 01 This document is issued to support Avaya Communication Server 1000 Release 7 5 Standard 04 02 This document is upissued to update the Avaya CS 1000M task flow graphic and to include CP PM version 2 content Standard 04 01 This document is issued for Avaya Communication Server 1000 Release 7 0 Standard 03 03 This document is upissued to update the CP PM BIOS upgrade procedure Standard 03 02 This document is upissued to include task flow graphics for Communication Server 1000 Release 6 0 Standard 03 01 This document is issued for Communication Server 1000 Release 6 0 Standard 02 01 This document is issued for Communication Server 1000 Release 5 5 Standard 01 03 This document is up issued for Communication Server 1000 Release 5 0 March 2013 July 2007 May 2007 April 2006 August 2
35. 1 2 bolts at y 9999997059359099 9097 SEER ESEAEEEEAASSEEEEAESE Holes for T 1 4 bolts we at 5 8 c c 7 o d h 3 F ep y l Ww e 4 ia si i 6 7 J 2 i Tan 4 i o q i i Bee p _ AES gt W 4 Ij AA S NNN ie N d j f ki j ka y 553 AAA0759 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 120 of 436 Installing DC power Figure 40 Ground and logic return distribution Large and Small Candeo power systems AC input Service panel Large System 120 V receptacle IG or ACEG Safety ground 6 AWG min BRE LRE Battery logic return reference Optional Batteries 4 Candeo power AC conduit system 5 a rectifiers Note 1 DC power feeds battery returns and logic return for Large System distribution pedestals Standard practice is to provide two load feeds for each Rack battery pedestal but each pedestal can support up to four load feeds for higher reliability if required Each BAT feed is paired with a modules BATRTN and there is one LRTN for each pedestal System Note 2 The Large Candeo power system delivers up to 500 A from a single Manager 42 1050 mm frame and up to 1000 A from a single 84 2100 mm frame The Small Cand
36. 164 of 436 Configuring the system monitor Figure 66 Cabling CS 1000M SG or Meridian 1 Option 61C single column with stacked Core Net modules cable master system monitor to SDI port To SDI port To next module Backplane CPU 0 To system monitor power supply assembly in the pedestal sasi 5 Daisy chain slave system monitors to the master a For a single column system skip this step b For a multiple column system beginning with the master system monitor cable in series slave 1 to slave 2 slave 2 to slave 3 and so on from connector J6 to connector J5 on each system monitor see Figure 67 on page 165 Terminate at connector J5 on the last column If columns are adjacent use an NT8D46AL cable If columns are not adjacent use an NT8D46AP cable NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Configuring the system monitor Page 165 of 436 Figure 67 Multiple column system monitor connections Column 0 Master system monitor Slave unit 1 Slave unit n From J6 To J5 From J6 to Terminate on J5 on master on slave 1 J5 on slave 2 of last column in series J3 J5 JE J4 From J6 of previous T pe To J5 of next _ system monitor slave system monitor NT8D46AL AP cable NT8D46AL AP cable NT8D46BH alarm cable Cable to external to MDF power equipment 553 3114 6 For PFTU or external alarm cabling connect a system monitor to MDF cable e
37. 436 Installing earthquake bracing 3 Install bracing rods e Position each rod in one of the vertical slots along the sides of the modules and insert the rods into the threaded holes in the pedestal see Figure 111 on page 339 Tighten the rods in by hand or snug tight with a 12 7 mm 1 2 in open end wrench e Place a tie bar over each pair of rods from side to side across the top of the module as shown in Figure 111 on page 339 e Secure the tie bars with flat washers and hexagon nuts Torque with 14 3 mm 9 16 in wrench to 17 6 J 13 0 ft lbs Note When installing expansion rods as part of the NT8D64BD bracing kit the rods are screwed into the previously installed rods by means of a coupling nut The resulting two piece rod should be secured in the same manner as the single rod described above NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing earthquake bracing Page 339 of 436 Figure 111 Installing bracing rods for column support Tie bars Earthquake rods Rods in slots between modules and exterior side panels Side panel Rods screw into pedestal 553 3063 4 Reinstall the top cap and grills e Position each top cap and install the bolts that secure it e Replace the air exhaust grills at the front and rear of each top cap 5 For a single column system reinstall the side panels on each module Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 340 of 436 Installing eart
38. A each The same breakers in the four feed PDU are rated at 28 A Figure 42 Optional four feed wiring 2 Cable tie saddle Cable restraint bar Cable tie saddle 553 AAA0468 A readily accessible disconnect device for input power is required CAUTION Service Interruption Damage to Equipment DC power for the NT7DO9 pedestal must be provided with circuit protection of 30 A for the BAT 0 1 and BAT 2 3 feeds see Figure 43 on page 123 Circuit breakers must be located next to each other and labeled to show that both must be shut off to remove all power to the system NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 123 of 436 Figure 43 PDU circuit protection 48 V source NT4N49AA PDU Circuit protection Terminal block Max 30 A BAT O y BAT 1 48 Max 30 A BAT 2 BAT 3 RTN O RTN 1 Ground bus LRE PRINS RIN3 LRTN 553 8990 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 124 of 436 Installing DC power A maximum loop drop of 2 V is allowed between the pedestal or junction box and the external power equipment See Table 5 for allowable wire sizes For more information about calculating wire size see Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering NN43021 220 Table 5 Wire gauge requirements with two 30 A feeds five wires 8 AWG 6 AWG Single 4 AWG Double 4 AWG
39. Column frame grounds Column 0 Column 1 Column n UPS frame grounds Bypass switch frame grounds Isolated ground bus Service panel 553 3089 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 96 of 436 Installing AC power NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 97 of 436 Installing DC power Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics DUAPOWered Sytem es neck ce Gkaecaahen peewee Sekee a eeee ives 97 Cmdeo DC power Syse aere sha eede debe oneieg Seka es 98 Large Canded Momules ive a2 cadeiceceiGeeg eked aE NEA 101 Small Cande Muetn5 5204 dct rariteiten biia eiA 105 Installation reference guide s isccriricisierpiritesritasetis 110 Conficuration rererence SUIdS cj scan i geet tiin onen arita 112 Safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring 113 Cabling and connecting the grounding leads 114 Connecting the power plant frame ground or safety ground leads 115 Fow Peed PDU scirrrprriee taeake dua dw EEE 121 Installing the Four Feed PDU riicscrseirisesriiereretirika 27 Installing safety ground protective earth wiring 127 Connecting power from the power plant to the PDU 129 Connecting UK power to the Four Feed PDU 133 Sysiem Monitor CONNECHONS or ad irrati arret EEEE 134 DC powered systems This chapter provides procedures to install safety ground protective earth and logic return w
40. Connect a system monitor to MDF cable to connector J3 on the master system monitor e Connect the cable at the alarm termination area at the MDF See Table 12 for the terminating sequence Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 166 of 436 Configuring the system monitor Note 1 The system monitor to MDF cable is available in three lengths NT8D46BH 9 75 m 32 ft NT8D46EH 30 m 100 ft and NT8D46DH 45 m 150 ft Note 2 f additional contact closures are required through the J3 REMALMA or REMALMB leads for a hard alarm in case a column loses power for example additional system monitor to MDF cables can be ordered Table 12 NT8D22 System Monitor pin assignments at J3 Pin Direction Color Signalname Description BL W REMALMA Remote major alarm connect for external alarm OR W REMALMB Remote major alarm return connect for external alarm GR W CE SYSLT CE system line transfer upgraded systems only BR W MDFO GND MDF return ground SL W CEALMIN CE alarm upgraded systems only SYSLTIN System line transfer in upgraded systems only LFBEN Line forced bypass enable connect for PFTU operation LFBENR Line forced bypass enable return connect for PFTU operation GND Ground Note Pins 6 8 and 9 should be connected and grounded at the MDF NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Configuring the system monitor Page 167 of 436 7 For AC powered systems with a UPS a Connect the appropriate ca
41. Dependency Lists are installed Perform the following acceptance tests after the system loading is completed 1 a A U N Testing the module power supply on page 320 Testing the blower unit and thermal sensor on page 321 Testing the sysload on page 323 Testing the system terminal and system monitor on page 324 Testing the PFTU on page 325 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 320 of 436 Performing acceptance tests See Software Input Output Administration NN43001 611 for a detailed explanation of software prompts and the Software Input Output System Messages NN43001 712 for the meaning of system messages and display codes generated during acceptance tests Note If you fail to see an expected display code while performing any test contact your Avaya support representative Testing the module power supply Use this procedure to test module power supplies and ringing generators and their interface to the system monitor This procedure should be performed for each power supply at system installation or whenever a module is installed Note Performing these tests on a single CPU system may cause a sysload Performing these tests on a dual CPU system may cause an initialization Disregard INI messages during the tests Procedure 52 Testing module power supply 1 Verify that the green LED on each power supply is lit and that each red column LED is OFF 2 Set the power supply
42. Distribution 300 panel The Candeo SP48300 can have either one or two distribution panels Each distribution panel can support 300 A The panels are used to connect small and medium capacity distribution loads They can accommodate a wide variety of distribution hardware in various configurations The initial distribution panel supports 18 load feeds and 8 battery feeds together with Battery Low Voltage Detection BLVD The supplementary distribution panel supports an additional 26 load feeds Both the initial main and supplementary distribution panels provide local fuse and or circuit breaker alarm indication by means of a red LED indicator In addition to providing protection and connecting points for the battery and battery return cables for the loads the initial distribution panel provides e aconnecting point for the system s main battery return reference BRR cable e connecting points for the bus bar links to bridge the supplementary distribution panel if provided e connecting points for the bridge cables for a field installed supplementary rectifier shelf if provided e connecting points for the interface with the outside world alarms inputs and outputs etc e anLVD contactor inhibit switch Battery enclosure for EMEA countries For EMEA countries if backup batteries are used a battery enclosure is required Individual batteries are Hawker Energy SBS 60 Valve Regulated Lead Acid VRLA 12 V DC nominal voltage
43. E E ee eee eee hedianagtees 137 About CErMINSIONG s serari ses pee apitat iie Rede deeeregne 137 Installation and designation cv si2sccuseseaese esse eeies anew es 137 Terminal bl ck TequIFeMEeNS 34 42 0564 o0neecaeedereadereedares 138 Installing the BIX cross connect terminal 04 138 Installing the Krone cross connect system UK 142 Installing Power Failure Transfer Units 149 CONIGING EE IEE hes REELS DEE osubig bate etek TETT 149 PRU c n OWON cosas peace se ebadae Rei heddg a kee shaders 149 Misali a PPL gt 66s bn0cch seeks tard Pete EA ER EANET 152 Connecting trunks and telephones 2 2 5 5 00s040e0s0n cena 153 fnpialline QUAG PFTUS orreri eo dan eRe ewe ENTERAR eees 154 Configuring the system monitor 155 CNIS is i ba eas Rh kee ee ee eee Lae e es 155 Syse IMGHOl CADING soc 25s noi enddapaned seas EN ERNAS 153 Configuring the System Monitor 0 2 0 0 eee eee ee 157 Cabling the System Monitor oss c ccheicev ree neses east ipse ts 161 Alari jntertacing to Canded cc osc acacnegeseaesesgderennsies 169 Configuring the alarm ports si0 icc ncssquvisedodegncive ance oed 172 UCI AL Ue Cit ee ee cer eee ir ee re ee eee Tere ere 13 Connecting a system terminal or modem 175 a st ice NT EAA ese feet eda chews ake EE 5 iaced dees 175 ADOUL The systemi terminal oooh ak eo Soe PAekeee tinki ptt eTa 175 Connecting GNCMINNE cid cteddesbagntoadionssideaibhesines 177 Connec
44. ESCG Y BL BL Y Note 1 Each of the following I O panel connectors is cabled as shown above connectors A B C D E F G H K L M N R S T and U These connectors are associated with backplane slots O through 15 sequentially Note 2 TA TB is the transmit pair RA RB is the receive pair Table 39 NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D15 E amp M Trunk Card 4 wire type 1 and type 2 mode pair terminations Part 1 of 2 Lead designations Type 1 Type 2 Pin numbers Pair color TA TB W BL BL W RA RB W O O W E M W G G W ESC ESCG W BR BR W TA TB W S S W RA RB R BL BL R E M R O O R ESC ESCG R G G R NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines and trunks Page 257 of 436 Table 39 NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D15 E amp M Trunk Card 4 wire type 1 and type 2 mode pair terminations Part 2 of 2 Lead designations Type 1 Type 2 Pin numbers Pair color TA TB R BR BR R RA RB R S S R E M BK BL BL BK ESC ESCG BK O O BK TA TB BK G G BK RA RB BK BR BR BK E M BK S S BK ESC ESCG Y BL BL Y Note 1 Each of the following I O panel connectors is cabled as shown above connectors A B C D E F G H K L M N R S T and U These connectors are associated with backplane slots O through 15 sequentially Note 2 TA TB is the transmit pair RA RB is the receive pair Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 258 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 40 NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections for NT
45. HP server to the TLAN subnet Insert the RJ 45 CAT5 or better cable into the TLAN Ethernet port on the back of the server Insert the other end of the cable into the TLAN subnet of the Layer 2 switch 2 Connect the HP server to the ELAN subnet Insert the RJ 45 CAT5 or better cable into the ELAN Ethernet port on the back of the server Insert the other end of the cable into the ELAN subnet of the Layer 2 switch 3 Connect a DTE DTE null modem serial cable from the Serial Port on the back of the server to a maintenance terminal 4 Connect the HP server power cord Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 414 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server a Check that the power cord is the type required in the region where you use the server Do not modify or use the supplied AC power cord if it is not the correct type b Attach the female end of the power cord to the mating AC power receptacle on the right hand side of the server back panel Plug the male end of the AC power cord into the AC power source wall outlet 5 Configure the COM1 serial port as the communication port for the connected maintenance terminal Configure the COM 1 baud rate for the serial port on the server to 9600 b ps See Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 6 Configure the connected maintenance terminal See Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 7 P
46. Installation and Commissioning Page 244 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 245 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Contents Overview This chapter contains information about the following topics OVENI Wecre parpi EEE OELA SURES OEE ERES a RRO RHODE aD RS 245 Cabling an IPE Module or Media Gateway 247 Connecting lines anid Inks 05 ocd aces ee downer ee ee aeeeesaes 250 Cables are designated by the letter of the I O panel cutout A B C and so on where the 50 pin cable connector is attached Each cable has three 20 pin connectors 16 positions are used designated 1 2 and 3 that attach to the backplane Using the designations described the backplane ends of the first cable are referred to as A 1 A 2 and A 3 The locations of the cable connectors on the backplane are designated by the slot number LO through L15 for NT8D37 and the shroud row 1 2 and 3 Using these designations the slot positions in the first slot are referred to as LO 1 LO 2 and LO 3 In NT8D37BA and NT8D37EC and later vintage IPE Modules all 16 IPE card slots support 25 pair cable connections Table 32 on page 246 shows the cable connections from the backplane to the inside of the I O panel Figure 104 on page 246 shows the designations for the backplane end of the cables the backplane slot designations for the cable connections and the associated network seg
47. Insulated ground wire must be used for system grounding NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing AC power Page 87 of 436 Multiple column systems use an insulated ground bus as the point where the logic return wires from different columns are consolidated before connecting to the single point ground Figure 28 Single column ground and logic return distribution AC input Large System Service panel 120 V receptacle IG or ACEG Logic return Cord or 6 AWG conduit Yo RRR ad Safety ground 6 AWG min 208 240 V receptacle 30 A L6 30 or IG L6 30 553 3154 1 Note In an isolated ground system the dedicated isolated ground bus bar in the service panel serves as the ground window It is used for all AC safety grounds and logic returns It also accommodates a conductor that references the battery bus in DC systems Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 88 of 436 Installing AC power Figure 29 Multiple column ground and logic return distribution AC input Large System Service panel 120 V receptacle gt IG or ACEG er Safety ground 6 AWG min Cord or conduit Logic return S reference meen 6 AWG 208 240 V AC conduit receptacles 30 A L6 30 AC conduit or IG L6 30 553 3155 1 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing AC power Page
48. LFBENR line forced bypass enable return MDF GND MDF GND PFTU connector P2 pin 24 Note At connector P1 on the PFTU pins 25 and 50 are labeled SWE for switch enable When pin 25 is grounded by the attendant console or pin 50 is grounded by the system monitor line transfer is activated 5 For AC powered systems install the A0367916 auxiliary power supply a Attach the unit to the wall using screws in the four mounting holes b Connect a 24 or larger AWG wire from the 48 V connection on the auxiliary power supply to the PFTU termination area on the MDF NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing Power Failure Transfer Units Page 153 of 436 c Connect a 24 or larger AWG wire from the ground GND connection on the auxiliary power supply to the PFTU termination area on the MDF d Connect a second 24 or larger AWG wire from the GND connection on the auxiliary power supply to the Large System alarm termination area on the MDF e Plug in the A0367916 auxiliary power supply Ifa UPS is used you must plug the power supply into an auxiliary output on the UPS Without a UPS plug the power supply into an outlet in the equipment room 6 For DC powered systems power the PFTU from the fused low current auxiliary power outputs on the DC power system One 1 33 A fuse supports up to six PFTUs End of Procedure Connecting trunks and telephones The ground start feature on 500 2500
49. O panel cutout NT8D88 superloop to I O panel cable 553 5289 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling network modules and loops Page 387 of 436 Figure 139 NT8D04 Superloop Network Card network loops network card to I O panel connections Superloop network card faceplate connectors Use NT8D88AD cables Core Network Module I O Panels Network Module I O Panels ROUMHZ ee a N O J23 J22 J21J200 OJ4 J3 J2 J10 all wit i ji 553 5290 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 388 of 436 Cabling network modules and loops Figure 140 NT8D04 Superloop Network Card network loops controller card to I O panel connections NT8D01 Peripheral Controller Card backplane connectors A Controller 248 oe we SL2 SLO Visible part of the backplane Left Right 553 3191 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 389 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Contents Introduction This chapter contains the following topics PWC GUMENCN 6 Nite Ich ddckewr Rh eabekeoiakealaehsbavae bane 389 Siemaline Server task IOW ccs cede eed eeedodere Tebei ER ES 390 Readiness CHECKS s sitenrrtedie banii SGhne anatek aku aban 392 Server card hardware Installation 6 c acancnseeekncegaaeigeeeae 394 CONICCHONG EE E TE TE TENETE EAT E T anaes 408 Upgrading and r
50. One terminal and a switch box to the SDI and COM1 ports Network Module SDI port on I O panel J25 on I O panel J25 on I O panel D Rear View Core Net 0 Core Net 1 NT8D95 cable NT8D95 cables Switch box NT8D95 cable Terminal Note The A0377992 switch box can be used in this configuration 553 A0135 Connecting a modem A modem must be connected to an SDI port in a network slot The modem provides an I O interface to the active CPU in the system for remote access NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Connecting a system terminal or modem Page 183 of 436 You can connect a modem to one of the following 1 2 An SDI port to remotely monitor general system operation The COM ports for debugging and patch downloading through your Avaya representative A remote connection to both the SDI and COM2 ports Modem guidelines At the Large System end the local end modems must be set to dumb mode command recognition OFF command echo OFF The local end modems can be configured with 1 one modem connected to the SDI port and the cable switched to each COM2 port as needed see Figure 73 on page 187 or one modem connected to a switch box that is connected to the SDI and COM2 ports see Figure 74 on page 189 Note The second method listed here is preferred Other configurations such as a separate modem for each port are possible At the remote end
51. Page 353 of 436 Figure 117 Module to module power and system monitor connections I O safety panel Power connectors between modules System monitor connectors I O safety panel Rear view 553 5152 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 354 of 436 Adding a module to a column Adding a module between two other modules If conduit or other cabling runs through modules that are being moved you must tag and disconnect the cables pull them out of the modules and reroute them after all of the modules are repositioned The top cap can remain on the module to which it is attached Procedure 64 Adding a module between two other modules 1 Disconnect and remove the NT8D22 System Monitor for the column in the rear of the pedestal do not turn off the blower unit in the front of the pedestals a If the column houses the master system monitor load LD 37 and software disable the associated SDI port LD 37 DIS TTY x disable the device associated with the port b Disconnect the RJ11 cable to J3 then the cable to J6 then pull the system monitor out of the slot 2 Turn off power as necessary e With AC power set the main circuit breaker for the column to OFF down in the rear of the pedestal DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Due to hazardous voltage in AC powered systems power to the entire column must be shut down This shuts down all functions in the column e With DC power set the switc
52. Preparing to power up DC CAUTION Verify that the safety grounds are properly connected Procedure 46 Preparing to power up DC 1 Set the AC service panel circuit breakers to each rectifier OFF 2 Remove the DC power distribution fuses or set the distribution circuit breakers OFF Set all circuit breakers in the rear of each pedestal OFF Set the power supply switches in each module OFF Set the ringing generators in each IPE or PE module OFF Set the blower unit in each pedestal OFF Set all faceplate switches to ENB N O a A Q Proceed to Turning DC power ON on page 290 End of Procedure Turning DC power ON Follow Procedure 47 to turn the DC power on NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 291 of 436 Procedure 47 Turning DC power ON 1 Connect each DC rectifier to its associated AC outlet and set the breakers in the AC power panel to ON 2 Turn the rectifiers ON one at a time Wait 10 seconds between each rectifier CAUTION Service Interruption System Failure If a problem occurs in any of the following steps resolve that problem before continuing IMPORTANT Perform the following tasks for each column Note Power up the Core columns last 3 On the DC power source for each column replace the distribution fuses or set the distribution breakers to ON Do the Core columns last 4 Set the blower unit breaker switch ON the far
53. Refer to Note 2 and Table 3 on page 116 for the recommended cable size If Then The power system shares a frame ground FG go to step 2 collector cable with other equipment The power system does not share an FG go to step 3 collector cable with other equipment Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 118 of 436 Installing DC power 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the FG collector with a parallel tap connector as shown in the left side illustration of Figure 38 on page 118 Continue with step 4 3 Connect the other end of the cable to the nearest floor ground bar FGB which in some sites may be the building principal ground BPG as shown in the right side illustration of Figure 38 on page 118 4 Repeat step 1 for any other frames as applicable 5 Secure the cables as required and use an identification tag with the wording PWR PLT FG to identify the cables at the BPG or FGB connection End of Procedure Figure 38 Typical installation of the power system frame ground lead BPG or FGB BPG or FGB y Collector cable or Candeo power system framework Candeo power system framework Battery stand rack or stack 553 AAA1515 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 119 of 436 Figure 39 Connection of the frame ground lead inside the frame Holes for M 3 8 bolts at1 c c t Holes for
54. SSSSSq4 SSSSSSSS AUTO CSU Feature no AUTO CSU Disabled Option Choice Status Comment SS SS SS SSSS SSS SS SSfSSS SSS SStSSSSSSSq4 SSS SSS SS gt IPMG Software no ok Option Choice Status Comment SS SS SSS SSS SSS SSSSfS SS SS SS St SSSSSSSq4pSSSSSSSS DATABASE yes ok from default floppy disk Option Choice Status Comment SS SSS SSS SSS SESS SSS SS SS SS StS SSS SSSq4 SSSSSSSS CP BOOTROM yes ok Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 312 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading 20 Upon returning to the main install menu enter q to quit KCR gt gt lt a gt lt b gt CP BOOTROM lt c gt lt d gt lt t gt lt k gt lt p gt lt q gt Enter INSTALL MENU The Software Installation Tool will install lor upgrade Succession Enterprise System Software Jatabase and the CP BOOTROM You will be prompted throughout the installation and given the opportunity to quit at any time Please enter To install Software CP BOOTROM To install Software Database To install Database only To install CP BOOTROM only To go to the Tools menu To install Keycode only For Feature Expansion use OVL143 To install 3900 set Languages Quit Choice gt q NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 313 of 436 21 The system t
55. Table 29 on page 222 are factory installed Table 28 Field installed Core cables internal Part 1 of 2 Number required Order Code Description per system NT4N88AA COM1 DTE terminal NT4N88BA COM2 DCE modem NT4N90BA Ethernet CP PIV card to I O panel NTRC17BA Crossover Ethernet cable Core to Core Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 222 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Table 28 Field installed Core cables internal Part 2 of 2 Number required Order Code Description per system Customer supplied Standard CAT5 Ethernet cable I O Panel to LAN switch Note f there is no connection to a LAN connect the two LAN 1 connectors using the NTRC17BA crossover cable Table 29 Factory installed Core cables internal Number required per Order Code Description system NT4N4405 Shelf Power Net backplane to Core backplane NT4N29AA cCNI to 3PE Core Net shelf cable NT4N89AA System Utility card to XSM see Figure 92 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 223 of 436 Figure 91 Core Net cable connections top view NTND14 cables cCNI to 3PE cables in Network Shelves Customer install Group 1 cable NT4N4405 Shelf Power cable J31 Ethernet cable factory installed from LAN 1 NT4N90BA NT4N89AA System Monitor cable factory installed J25 DTE cable from COM 1 NT4N88A lt A for terminal J21
56. Table 33 Line and trunk pair termination tables NT8D37 IPE Module Line cards Table 34 on page 251 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Table 35 on page 253 Trunk cards NT8D15 E amp M Trunk Card Table 36 on page 254 through to Table 38 on page 255 NT5K17 DDI Trunk Card Table 40 on page 258 through toTable 42 on page 261 NT5K18 Flexible Central Office Trunk card Table 43 on page 263 through to Table 45 on page 267 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M Trunk card Table 46 on page 269 through to Table 58 on page 282 Table 34 NT8D37 IPE Module line card pair terminations Part 1 of 2 Unit Pair color 24 card 1T 1R W BL BL W 2T 2R W O O W 3T 3R W G G W 4T 4R W BR BR W 5T 5R W S S W 6T 6R R BL BL R Pin numbers fo 7T 7R R O O R 8T 8R R G G R 9T 9R R BR BR R AN DOA PWD 10T 10R 11T 11R 12T 12R 13T 13R Large System Installation and Commissioning R S S R BK BL BL BK BK O O BK BK G G BK pizo Page 252 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 34 NT8D37 IPE Module line card pair terminations Part 2 of 2 Unit Pin numbers Pair color 24 card 14T 14R BK BR BK BR 15T 15R BK S S BK 16T 16R Y BL BL Y 17T 17R Y O O Y 18T 18R Y G G Y 19T 19R Y BR BR Y 20T 20R Y S S Y 21T 21R V BL BL V 22T 22R V O V O 23T 23R V G G V 24T 24R V BR BR V 25T 25R V S S V Note Each of the following I O panel connectors is cabled as shown above connectors A B C D E F G H K L M N R S T and U These connector
57. These cards synchronize Large System functions Figure 102 on page 241 shows the two Clock Controllers installed in a two column system The Clock Controllers Cards must be installed as directed in the following three rules 1 Two Clock Controller cards must be installed in each system The Clocks must be connected to each other and to the FIJI cards in Network Group 0 2 One Clock Controller must be installed in Network Shelf 0 slot 13 A second Clock Controller must be installed in Network Shelf 1 slot 13 3 Clock Controllers should be installed in different Network groups if possible IMPORTANT The Clock Controller cannot be installed in the Core Net shelf NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Figure 102 Clock Controller placement Group 1 shelf 1 J3 Group 2 shelf a e a E m gt j i le res F NTRC46 cab NTRC46 cab e Clock 0 to J4 FIJI e Clock 1 to J3 FIJI Group0 NTRC49 Clock to Clock cable arouse 553 9121 Connect the cables to the Clock Controllers as shown in Figure 103 on page 243 Procedure 37 Connecting the Clock Controller cables 1 Connect the Clock to Clock cable a Connect P
58. and Commissioning Page 130 of 436 Installing DC power c Connect the wires to the matching connections on the terminal block on the junction box i Connect the red wires to BAT 0 BAT 1 BAT 2 and BAT 3 ii Connect the black wires to BATRTN O BATRTN 1 BATRTN 2 and BATRTN 3 iii Connect the orange or white wire to LRTN 7 For installations that do not use a junction box a Route two red wires between the power plant and the pedestal of the column being wired b Route two black wires between the power plant and the pedestal of the column being wired c Route one orange or white wire for the logic return ground LRTN between the power plant and the pedestal of the column being wired d Route the wires within the cable tie saddles and under the cable restraint bar at the base of the pedestal 8 Connect wires to the PDU a Connect a red wire for each module to BAT 0 BAT 1 BAT 2 and BAT 3 on the connection block b Connect a black wire for each module to BATRTN O BATRTN 1 BATRTN 2 and BATRTN 8 on the connection block c Connect the orange or white wire to the LRTN terminal on the connection block 9 Connect wires to the power plant a Connect the red wires to the first two circuit breakers in the main control distribution panel See Figure 47 for PDU to Large Candeo DC Power Plant connections Each new column connects the next two available circuit bre
59. connects through termination areas at the MDF PFTU Auxiliary 48 V DC System monitor 1 2 3 4 Attendant console optional 5 Designated telephones 6 Central Office trunks NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 155 of 436 Configuring the system monitor Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics System Monitor CADIS a ass 45s REESE R REDE ORE EKO RE ERED 35 Configuring the System Monon s iisierorsesirip dirait e riras 157 Cabling the Systemi Monitor o5 cs4c esses dese nasee wena were 161 Alarm interfacing to Cande os g4 366454 e4 canoes ideewisoasivas 169 Configuring the alarm Ports io5ccaeedeiead sees eeseeneaaiie es 172 Customizing alarig c0 ci aE R TERI ERES 173 System monitor cabling Multi column systems Cabling between system monitors in a multi column system requires the use of a single cable The cabling is done in a daisy chain fashion with the master system monitor at the beginning of the chain The address of each slave system monitor must be unique and there cannot be any gaps in the slave numbering Figure 63 shows a typical cabling scheme between columns Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 156 of 436 Configuring the system monitor Figure 63 System monitor to system monitor serial link cabling Column 0 Column 1 Column n Master XSM Slave XSM Slave XSM Pedestal Pedestal n 63 maximum NT8D46AL ae NT8D46AP wr 553 7551
60. containing the customer database must be in the floppy drive of the MMDU pack lt e gt Check the database that exists on the Fixed Media Device lt q gt Quit Enter choice gt a Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 310 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading 19 Continue with database installation Communication Server 1000 Software Database BOOTROM RMD Install Tool You selected to transfer single database from RMD to FMD on Core 0 The database will be converted from release xxxx If you quit now the database will be left unchanged Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt Continue with database install lt q gt Quit Enter choice gt a or lt CR gt NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 311 of 436 The installation summary screen appears Verify successful installation and enter lt CR gt when ready INSTALLATION STATUS SUMMARY SSSSsSSSsSSSS SSSSSSSH4 SSSSSSSH4fSSSSSSSSSSS Option Choice Status Comment a SW RMD to FMD yes ok install for rel XXXXX SSS SS SS SSS SSSt SS SSS SSStS SS SS Sat S SSS SSS SSSS Option Choice Status Comment SSSSsSSSSSSSSS SSH SSSSSSSH4 SSSS SHH SSSHS SH Dependency Lists no SSSS SSS SSS SSSSSSSfS SSS SSSStSSSSSSSq4 SSSSSSSS Option Choice Status Comment SS SSS SSS SESS SSS SSfS SSS SSS St SS
61. drop into battery stands racks or stacks is usually 6 AWG Table 3 Recommended cable size for the frame ground collector Cable length 0 to 6 m 0 to 20 ft Recommended see notes 1 and 2 2 AWG size above 6 to 12 m 20 to 40 ft 0 AWG 12 to 24 m 40 to 80 ft 0000 AWG 24 to 50 m 80 to 160 ft Table 4 500 kcmil Torque values for bolted connections Part 1 of 2 Bolt size Threads inch Torque in Ib Tension Ib 10 6 mm 1 4 in 8 mm 5 16 in 9 5 mm 3 8 in NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 117 of 436 Table 4 Torque values for bolted connections Part 2 of 2 Bolt size Threads inch Torque in Ib Tension Ib 11 mm 7 400 5110 16 in 425 5120 13 mm 1 2 in 550 6110 575 6140 16 mm 5 8 in 920 7350 see note 19 mm 3 4 in 1400 9300 see note 22 mm 7 8 in 1950 11100 see note 25 mm 1 in 2580 12900 see note Note Bolt sizes 6 mm to 25 mm 5 8 in to 1 in apply to Large Candeo only Procedure 7 Installing and connecting the power plant frame ground leads 1 Use the appropriate two hole lug to connect one end of a cable to the frame ground plate at the top of the frame for a top fed system or at the bottom for a bottom fed system as shown in Figure 39 on page 119 Apply the appropriate torque see Table 4 for torque values Note
62. fdiskPartCreate 0x12d5ff0c Size in sectors 0x8000 Low boundary 0 High boundary 0xle8bdf fdiskPartCreate 0x12d5ff0c Size in sectors 0x98000 Low boundary 0x7fcl High boundary 0xle8bdf fdiskPartCreate 0x12d5ff0c Size in sectors 0x98000 Low boundary 0x9ffcl High boundary 0xle8bdf fdiskPartCreate 0x12d5ff0c Size in sectors 0x98000 lt a gt Partition the Fix Media Device gt Repartitioning Fix Media Device 1 4 0x10 2 11 0x130 37 Ely 0130 4 11 0x130 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 296 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading Low boundary 0x137 fcl1 High boundary 0xle8bdf gt Fix Media Device repartition completed gt Formatting FMD Mounting msdos fs boot on dev hdal fdiskDevCreate dev hdal dev hdal partTablePtr 0x12d5ff0c Found partition 1 nodePtr 0x12d30a4c Partition 1 type MSDOS FAT16 lt 32MB cbioPtr Ox131leb2e8 Initializing new slave device 0x131leb2e8 Retrieved old volume params with 95 confidence Volume Parameters FAT type FAT16 sectors per cluster 32 2 FAT copies 0 clusters 245 sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 1 hidden 63 FAT sectors 490 Root dir entries 512 sysId null serial number 3b69lafd Label NO NAME m isk with 32705 sectors of 512 bytes will be formatted with Volume Parameters FAT type FAT16 sectors per cluster 2 2 FAT copies 16240 clusters 64
63. handling precautions 000 002 e ee eee Preparing the equipment for installation 00005 Placing the fourth module on a column COENE e ode Gre Rhee Pere bate een dea R Ok pede Es ee INEO W iid cc esis ng bee Rede eeoeereeekadee tebe wautes Placing the fourth module on a column s 04 Positioning and leveling equipment Ot er ee ee ee Positioning and leveling the equipment Installing overhead cable tray kits COS 6 2 cere neter T bucad dg EEEE ET Installing overhead cable tray kits 2 2 eee eee ee eee Installing AC power 202 00ee eee eeee CONUS sibecsheesee ees eehe ie ashe Petes dees eessiane AL POwered Ses ice ic ee deo hka an dee eedebs Safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring Installing safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring Installing UPS ground cabling oosccd ceed He ts oe heres Installing DC power 0 00ee eee eeee COMeila 2 E E A EEN ead eed eeeese ete E T E E T DC poweored sylem oeoosirei ieee Ere EREEREER NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 41 41 42 49 58 62 66 69 69 69 69 Ta Ta 81 81 81 85 85 85 86 90 93 97 97 Contents Page 7 of 436 Candea DC power SyStEDIS occ ciaioeteseehaeorese rerun aeeens 98 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame 000008 137 COMING ic n ca ose ng E E E
64. left breaker in the rear of the pedestal 5 Set the blower unit switch in the front of the pedestal to ON Verify that the fan is running On initial power up the blower rotates slowly As the system heats up the cooling fans turn faster 6 Set the power supply switch in each module to ON The green light will turn on after a few seconds Note f the module is equipped with a ringing generator set the breakers or switches for both the power supply and the ringing generator to ON The green LED on a ringing generator normally takes up to 90 seconds to light 7 Repeat step 1 through step 5 for each column in the system Start with Column 2 and continue until power is turned on in all the columns Do the Core columns last Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 292 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading 8 Make sure the green lights in all the module power supplies are lit before proceeding to the next column The red LED for each column remains lit until the system reloads Once the system is running reattach all covers and panels to the modules and columns Module covers must be kept on so the air from the pedestal fans will be directed up through all the modules and out the exhaust vents in the top cap When the module covers are removed the upper modules are not cooled properly because the air escapes from the open module door If the module covers are left off and the system overheats circuit cards wil
65. occurs allow it to complete e The column LED should go out e The system terminal should display PWR0044 PWRO0046 and PWR0047 Repeat step 5 and step 6 for the other thermal sensor End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Performing acceptance tests Page 323 of 436 Figure 107 Blower unit removal Retaining screw Blower unit circuit breaker Retaining screw 553 3040 Testing the sysload Use Procedure 54 to test the sysload manual reload function Procedure 54 Sysload test 1 Start the sysload e Simultaneously press the MAN RST buttons the bottom buttons on both Call Processor Cards The following functions occur during a sysload e The red LED at the top of the CPU column should light e The major alarm indication should be displayed on all attendant consoles Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 324 of 436 Performing acceptance tests On the LCD displays on the Cards e Following the Selftest Complete message watch the LCD for the message IOP in Slot 17 e Watch the LCD for the message Loading Disk OS e When the sysload is complete the system terminal displays DONE and the system automatically invokes the initialization program The following functions occur when the initialization is complete e The column LED should go out e The major alarm indication should disappear from all attendant consoles e The system automatically runs
66. of module gt a patel Lh Lae A lt Cabling troughs 553 3117 A typical routing scenario from the faceplate of a printed circuit pack PCP to one of the I O panels is as follows e The cable comes off the faceplate of a PCP and drops down into the front horizontal cable trough e The cable is routed to the right side of the module in the horizontal cable trough to the vertical cable trough e The cable is routed to the back of the module and into the rear horizontal cable trough e The cable is routed to the left or right I O panel at the rear of the module When connecting two half group networks together the cables are routed vertically through the square holes in the rear horizontal cable trough All other internal vertical cable routing from one module to another should be done only in the right vertical cable trough Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 60 of 436 Preparing for installation Since all faceplate to I O panel cables are the same length and card positions in the card cage vary a cable can contain excess slack It is therefore recommended that cables from cards in the left side of the card cage use the right I O panel and cables from cards in the right side of the card cage use the left I O panel whenever possible as shown in Figure 14 Figure 14 Top view of front
67. parity Turn the modem on and enter each command listed in Table 18 with a carriage return press Enter or Return key The modem responds OK to every command except for the last two commands ATQ1 and AT amp W NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Connecting a system terminal or modem Page 185 of 436 Table 18 Modem Commands AT amp F Load active profile AT amp HO Flow control disabled AT amp D3 Resets on receipt of DTR AT amp S1 Modem controls DSR ATSO 1 Answer after 1 ring ATS2 128 Escape character ASCII 128 ATS7 60 Pause one second for carrier detection ATQ1 Quiet mode AT amp W Store active profile 6 Disconnect the power cord and serial from the modem 7 Set DIP switches 1 and 4 to ON down and the remaining switches OFF up End of Procedure Connecting a modem to an SDI port Use Procedure 22 to connect an SDI port directly no switch box to a modem see Figure 73 on page 187 Procedure 22 Connecting a modem to an SDI port 1 Atthe remote end connect an RS 232 cable to the terminal and to the modem 2 Atthe remote end connect the cable from the modem to an RJ11 telephone jack If a cable is required connect an NT8D46 cable to the modem and to the RJ11 jack Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 186 of 436 Connecting a system terminal or modem 3 At the local end configure the modem Follow the manufacturer s instructions to set the modem for 9600 baud auto answ
68. pedestal Make sure the module being added is facing the same direction as the column b Place the module being added on the pedestal and adjust it until it is seated securely on the positioning guides Secure the mounting bolts for the module Place the module that was removed onto the top of the module that was added and secure it with the mounting bolts Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 352 of 436 Adding a module to a column 5 Connect the power and system monitor cables in the module a Connect the power connectors to the pedestal and to the module above see Figure 115 on page 350 and Figure 117 on page 353 b Attach the frame ground wires to the frame ground post at the base of the module c Connect the system monitor cable from the pedestal to connector J1 on the module being added d Connect the system monitor cable from connector J2 in the module being added to J1 in the module above 6 Set all circuit breakers in the pedestal to ON 7 Reinstall the system monitor in the pedestal a Reconnect the RJ11 cable to J6 then the cable to J3 Reinstall the system monitor b If the column houses the master system monitor load LD 37 and software re enable the associated SDI port LD 37 ENL TTY x enable the device associated with the port TERE exit LD 37 8 Replace all module covers and the pedestal grill End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Adding a module to a column
69. powered from an auxiliary 48 V DC fused output from the external power equipment Figure 61 shows a high level view of PFTU alarm connections For PFTU operation the wiring from the following equipment cross connects through termination areas at the MDF 1 PFTU 2 Auxiliary power supply 3 System monitor 4 Attendant console optional Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 150 of 436 Installing Power Failure Transfer Units 5 Designated telephones DTMF or rotary dial types 6 Central office trunks Figure 61 MDF terminations for typical PFTU operation PFTU PFTU Telephone CO trunk IPE terminations terminations terminations TT oT TOUTE THT P1 TTT OTT TT TT Te ICCC TE TTT OTT TT TT TO oT TUT THT P2 TT Auxiliary System alarm J3 terminations System monitor power supply 48V normally open GRD 553 5137 Figure 62 on page 151 shows detail view of the PFTU alarm connections The PFTU can be activated by system power failure and using the Attendant console TC switch If more than one Attendant console is connected to the system it must be connected in parallel with the main Attendant console as shown in the figure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Figure 62 Installing Power Failure Transfer Units Page 151 of 436 Typical PFTU connection to the MDF and the Master System Monitor DEES 154 when activated
70. sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 1 hidden 63 FAT sectors 128 Root dir entries 512 sysId VXDOS16 serial number 3b691lafd NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 297 of 436 iabel 7 Mounting msdos fs p on dev hda2 fdiskDevCreate dev hda2 dev hda2 partTablePtr 0x12d5ff0c Found partition 2 nodePtr 0x12d30a4c Partition 2 type Win95 FAT32 cbioPtr 0x12d26ee8 Tnitializing new slave device 0x12d26ee8 Retrieved old volume params with 80 confidence Volume Parameters FAT type FAT16 sectors per cluster 195 61 FAT copies 0 clusters 50115 sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 15421 hidden 1010580541 FAT sectors 3057015 Root dir entries 15421 sysId null serial number cfcfc3c3 Label Jisk with 622592 sectors of 512 bytes will be formatted with Volume Parameters FAT type FAT32 sectors per cluster 8 2 FAT copies 77660 clusters 608 sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 32 hidden 63 FAT sectors 1216 Root dir entries 0 sysId VX5D0S32 serial number cfcfc3c3 Label Oxl2d22e7c Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 298 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading Mounting msdos fs d on dev hda3 fdiskDevCreate dev hda3 dev hda3 partTablePtr 0x12d5ff 0c Found partition 3 nodePtr 0x12d30a4c Partition 3 type Win95 FAT32 cbioPtr Ox12d
71. the Core Net module backplane you must use the P0741489 Extraction Tool provided located in the rear of the module behind the I O safety panel CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not pry the against the connector with the extraction tool Simply inserting the tool between the connector and the securing clip is sufficient to unlock the connector Prying may cause damage to the connector or the backplane pins NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Page 193 of 436 Figure 76 NT4N41 Core Net shelf fanout panel backplane NT4N89 cable Network backplane Core backplane System Monitor XSM connections J Group 5 Group3 Group2 Group1 Group7 Group 6 Group 4 B 3B i3 3 i3 B slot 12 slot 11 slot 11 slot 10 slot 10 slot 9 porto f fportif porto fpotif Jporto port1 j4 slot 10 port1 j4 j j4 slot 12 sotia fsiot11 portof portii porto NT4N29 cable j3 slot 9 port 0 j slot 9 port 0 Group 0 NT4N29 cable 553 9473 NT8D99AD cable NT8D99AD cable To other E Core Net D Core Net module The Core Net modules contain two distinct sets of circuit cards Core cards and Network cards This section contains instructions on 1 Reviewing Core Net module placement on p
72. the programs in the midnight routine 2 Press the return key on the system terminal to monitor the progress of the midnight routines until the OVL111 BKGD response is received End of Procedure Testing the system terminal and system monitor Use Procedure 55 to test the system terminals connected to the Large System Procedure 55 Testing system terminal and system monitor 1 Log into the system LOGI password 2 Enter the program and check the status of the system monitor LD 37 STAT XSM 3 Test the terminal TTY x x is the device number assigned to the system terminal The system terminal should display ABCDEFGHIJKLM NOPQRSTUVWXYZ NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Performing acceptance tests Page 325 of 436 amp lt gt READY FOR INPUT Step through the keys on the keyboard one at a time All keyboard input should be echoed until END is entered Exit LD 37 KKK End of Procedure Testing the PFTU Use Procedure 56 to test a PFTU and its interface with the system monitor Procedure 56 Testing the PFTU and its interface 1 Set the line transfer switch on the PFTU to BYPASS Associated attendant consoles should display a major alarm Set the line transfer switch on the PFTU to NORMAL Set the line transfer switch on the attendant console associated with the PFTU to ON Associated attendant consoles should display a major alarm Set the line transfer switch on the attendant console asso
73. there is room to route cables horizontally from front to rear on the left side front view of the module CAUTION Service Interruption System Failure Cables must be routed as perpendicular as possible to any nearby power cables Avoid routing cables near power cables if alternate routing is available At the rear of the module cables routed between the I O panel and the rear cover can be parallel to the power cables because the panel provides EMI shielding NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 213 of 436 Figure 87 NT4N41 Core Net shelf fanout panel backplane NT4N89 cable Network backplane Core backplane System Monitor XSM connections A N Group7 Group6 Group5 Group4 Group3 Group2 Group1 3 3 B i3 slot 12 slot 11 slot 11 slot 10 slot 10 port 0 port1 portO TTS oaaae JPTE j4 ia j4 i4 slot 12 J slot 13 slot 10 port1 porto porta port1 porto eo NT4N29 cable Groupo NT4N29 cable 553 9473 NT8D99AD cable NT8D99AD cable To other E Core Net D A label kit is included in the system package Use of these labels is optional Core Net module The Core Net modules contain two distinct sets of circuit cards Core cards and Network cards s
74. type telephones connected to CO trunks requiring a ground start condition is not required Automatic ground start is performed by the PFTU However rotary dials dial pulse are required on telephones assigned to trunks that are not equipped to recognize tone pulses touch tone See the PFTU documentation for MDF cable terminations for telephones and trunks associated with the PFTU If the connections are not designated on the connecting blocks mark the blocks as shown in the documentation or install the appropriate designation strips Procedure 14 Connecting trunks and telephones 1 For each telephone assigned to the PFTU e Connect the tip and ring of the line card to the first pair of the assigned PFTU e Connect the tip and ring of the telephone to the second pair of the assigned PFTU Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 154 of 436 Installing Power Failure Transfer Units 2 For each trunk assigned to the PFTU e Connect the tip and ring of the CO card to the third pair of the assigned PFTU e Connect the tip and ring of the trunk to the fourth pair of the assigned PFTU End of Procedure Installing QUA6 PFTUs QUA6 PFTUs are used for Large System installations The QUA6 PFTU is powered from an auxiliary 48 V DC fused output from the external power equipment Figure 61 on page 150 shows a high level view of QUA6 PFTU alarm connections For PFTU operation the wiring from the following equipment cross
75. 0 to 3 m 10 ft 3 to 6 m 20 ft 6 to 9 m 30 ft 9 to 12 m 40 ft 12 to 15 m 50 ft 15 to 18 m 60 ft 18 to 21 m 70 ft 21 to 24 m 80 ft 24 to 27 m 90 ft 27to30m 100 ft 30 to 60 m 200 ft over 60 m 200 ft Note 1 Two 30 A feeds are typically adequate for a column with four modules five wires total two 30 A feed pairs plus logic return Note 2 If dual conduit is used the wires must be run in battery battery return pairs with one pair in one conduit and the other pair plus logic return in the other conduit Legend Yes Wire size is adequate for the distance No Wire size has too high a voltage drop and is inadequate for the distance NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 125 of 436 The following equipment is located in the rear of each pedestal see Figure 44 in Large System columns e The PDU distributes power to the entire column e The field wiring terminal provides the connection point for wiring brought into the pedestal e lt A circuit breaker is provided for each module in the column and for the blower unit e All column circuit breakers will trip if a column thermal overload is detected or a DC power low voltage condition is sensed e The system monitor checks the column temperature cooling system status and system voltage status and controls alarms and line transfer states accordingly Figure 44 DC power equipment in the rear of the pedestal
76. 000 si o1 5 6456 oo banas rkt inkeri rotia 331 Installing Kit A and Kit B anchor plates 00 333 Installing earthquake Eds icccccocctworcersoseenoncee eek eenes 335 Positioning and leveling the system 0 24 0 0600s 00 dee wees 341 Installing non s ismic DACIND cnc cessed esse ekiko sk Erens 342 Installing a non seismic anchor kit 55c6soscceeecaneseeeene 343 Adding a module to a column 347 COMING okie hen ern R VETOES DORSET OCR RT EERE IAS 347 OVENI W hi on ickG So Re AG REESE Seb EE E ENE er eeii 347 Adding a module to the base of a colum c42sccseeiceiseeeeans 348 Adding a module between two other modules 354 Adding a module to the top of a column 358 Cabling network modules and loops 367 CMU 6 ic creak eens cencesny ORTNER IENE TENERS 367 Network to network cabling 0 00 e cece eee eee eee 367 Network module CONMGCHONG srescre siere denen ekiri Ere 368 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Contents Page 11 of 436 Network Group 0 Shelf 0 to Shelf I occ ences ee ceereens ae eeew 368 Connecting the 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules 368 Connecting the Core Net backplanes 25 2 e00iek0e0ecdeen4 369 Connecting Groups 1 through 7 Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 370 Connecting the Network modules to the Core Net modules ae Connecting the 3PE cables to the 3PE fanout panels 378 Cablin
77. 005 September 2004 October 2003 New inthis release Page 15 of 436 Standard 01 02 This document is up issued for Communication Server 1000 Release 5 0 Standard 01 01 This document is up issued for Communication Server 1000 Release 5 0 This document contains information previously contained in the following legacy document now retired Avaya Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration 553 3021 210 Standard 4 00 This document is up issued with corrections from CR Q01311083 The corrections appear in the Configuring the System Monitor section page 157 to page 161 Standard 3 00 This document is up issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 Standard 2 00 This document is up issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4 0 Standard 1 00 This is a new document for Succession 3 0 It was created to support a restructuring of the Documentation Library which resulted in the merging of multiple legacy documents This new document consolidates information previously contained in the following legacy documents now retired e Cabling Guide 553 3001 109 e System Installation Procedures 553 3001 210 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 16 of 436 New in this release NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 17 of 436 List of Procedures Procedure 1 Preparing the equipment for installation 66 Procedure 2 Placing
78. 1 Connecting the Network Shelf 0 3PE cards to Core Net 0 on page 379 2 Connecting the Network Shelf 1 3PE cards to Core Net 1 on page 379 Figure 136 3PE faceplate to Fanout panel connections Network Group 1 Shelf 0 example Peripheral Signaling NETWORK Clock Controller OCMC 3 Port Extender NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK PRIDTI Ful Power Supply Group3 Group 2 NTND14 cable j3 slot 9 port 0 j4 slot 9 port 0 NTND14 cable 553 9492 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling network modules and loops Page 379 of 436 Refer to Table 62 on page 376 for cCNI port and slot assignments Connect Shelf 0 3PE cards to the Core Net 0 panel connect Shelf 1 3PE cards to the Core Net panel The 3PE cables for Network Group 0 are factory installed Procedure 69 Connecting the Network Shelf 0 3PE cards to Core Net 0 1 Connect a NTND14 cable of the appropriate length from J3 on the 3PE card faceplate in Network Group 1 Shelf 0 to the Port 9 1 J3 connection on the 3PE Fanout panel in Core Net 0 Connect a NTND14 cable of the appropriate length from J4 on the 3PE card faceplate in Network Group 1 Shelf 0 to the Port 9 1 J4 connection on the 3PE Fanout panel in Core Net 0 Connect a NTND14 cable of the appropriate length from J3 on the 3PE ca
79. 1 Connect a NT8D80 cable from the J4 port in the Core Net 0 3PE card to J4 port in the Core Net 1 3PE card 2 Connect a second NT8D80 cable from the J3 port in Core Net 0 to the J3 port in Core Net 1 Note The 3PE cards are located in Core Net slot 11 End of Procedure Inspecting CNI to 3PE factory installed cables New NT4N29AA cables must be installed for existing Network Group 0 If the system has XSDI cards reinstall the cards and attach the cables Procedure 27 Inspecting NT4N29A lt A factory installed cables 1 If Network Group 0 will be in the Core Net the factory configuration of the new Core Net modules is correct Continue on to Connecting the Core Net backplanes on page 206 2 If Network Group 0 will not be in the Core Net module reconfigure the processor module Note Reconfiguration of the processor module is required to allow for concurrent or future use of the Network portion of the Core Net for a higher Network group The NT4N41 shelf card cage is factory installed with NT4N29 cables and is configured as Group 0 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Page 205 of 436 a Use the extraction tool to disconnect the NT4N29 cables from the Core backplane b Connect the cables to the appropriate group see Table 24 Table 24 Fanout panel to 3PE card connectors Group Fanout Panel Number connector 3PE card connector 0 connects from 9 0 J3 to 0 conn
80. 1 of the NTND49 cable to port J3 of Clock Controller 0 b Connect P2 of the NTND49 cable to port J3 of Clock Controller 1 2 Connect the Clock to Clock and Clock to FIJI cables Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 241 of 436 Page 242 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system a At Clock 0 Connect the J1 Clock end of a Clock to FIJI cable NTRC46Ax to the J1 end of the Clock to Clock cable b At Clock 1 Connect the J1 Clock end of a second Clock to FIJI cable NTRC46Ax to the J2 end of the Clock to Clock cable 3 Connect the Clock 0 to FIJI cable a Connect P1 of the NTRC46 cable from Clock 0 to J4 of the FIJI card in Group 0 Shelf 0 b Connect P2 of the NTRC46 cable from Clock 0 to J4 of the FIJI card in Group 0 Shelf 1 4 Connect a Clock 1 to FIJI cable a Connect P1 of the NTRC46 cable from Clock 1 to J3 of the FIJI card in Group 0 Shelf 0 b Connect P2 of the NTRC46 cable from Clock 1 to J3 of the FIJI card in Group 0 Shelf 1 End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 243 of 436 Figure 103 Clock Controller cable configuration Cc Cc L L O 0 Cc Cc K K 0 1 P1 NTRC49 cable po J1 i J1 Clock J1 Clock FIJI card FIJI card Group 0 Group 0 shelf 1 shelf 0 m To El J3 j P2 x Pim J3 J4 P2 Pim J4 ji NTRC46 cables 553 9496 Large System
81. 1 vintage F or later 3 Port Extender PS QPC43 vintage R or later Peripheral Signaling Card Order Code NT8D75 NT8D80 3PE to 3PE Description Clock Controller cable 3 Port Extender cable Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 202 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Figure 81 CP PIV Core Net Module slot Net Core E P jz E Y gt g 5 S 8 con S S Q g a Efo x x S 8 o 5 5 5 2 GS co no 2 2 2 BS 5 aj ao E 2 2 2 2 5 2 g g g S 1 a 5 8 8 8 ojej u g D i fo S ej 5 E Q Q 2 e ol amp Q Fr p O 1 a 2 O e gt 3 3 3 Bl s a a a a a SIZ oc oO i3 E E E E E ao Q z z 2 z z Oj PS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 c9 c10c11c12c13 c14 c15 CP Configuring and cabling the Clock Controllers Two Clock Controller cards NTRB53 are required in each system to synchronize functions The Clock Controllers cards must be installed as directed in the following two rules 1 Two Clock Controller cards must be installed in each system The Clocks must be connected to each other in Network Group 0 2 The two Clock Controllers must be installed in Slot 9 of each Core Net module For more inf
82. 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning NN43021 310 e CS 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrades Overview NN43021 458 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 36 of 436 Introduction Figure 1 Avaya Communication Server 1000M task flow CS 1000 Network Back up databases Establish UCM Deployment Server and Primary Security Server NN43001 315 Build software library and provide keycodes j NN43001 315 Define pre deployment strategy and commit NN43001 315 Deploy applications to servers with bootable Linux media or patched release 6 0 Linux Server VxWorks Call Server IM Presence MAS NRS Subscriber Manager CS 1000 Systems CS 1000 HS Signaling Server l NN43001 315 Manage Security NN43001 604 End NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 CS 1000M Back up databases Install CS 1000M CP PIV Core 0 VxWorks software NN43041 310 NN43041 458 Establish database NN43041 310 NN43041 458 Join Security domain NN43041 310 NN43041 458 Install CS 1000M CP PIV Core 1 VxWorks software NN43041 310 NN43041 458 Join Security domain NN43041 310 NN43041 458 Introduction Page 37 of 436 Summary of procedures 1 10 Prepare equipment for installation go to Preparing the equipment for installation on page 66 Place the fourth module on a column if required go to Placing the fourth module on a column
83. 15 System Monitor connections NT8D46xx Connector pins Suggested alarm P1 1 Black DCONO Rectifier Fail P1 2 Red DCON1 Major P1 3 White DCON2 Major P1 4 Green DCON3 Major P1 5 Orange ALARM Low Float Voltage Not used Not used Not used Not used Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 172 of 436 Configuring the system monitor Table 16 Cable lengths NT8D46AV 9 75 m 32 ft NT8D46BV 19 5 m 64 ft NT8D46CV 30 m 100 ft Cabling the Candeo Table 17 There are eight configurable Candeo output ports for output alarms Each output port can use one of the following three contact types normally open normally closed and common Large Systems use normally closed contacts Common contacts connect to the Candeo battery return bus The connector strip J8 is used for all output connections and is removable from the System Manager for ease of wiring Ensure that pin 1 is in the correct orientation for wiring when strip has been removed Alarm configuration NT8D46xx DCONO Candeo alarm port Black Port 1 Candeo J8 connector J8 1 Normally Closed Candeo configuration Loss of AC power DCON1 Red Port 2 J8 1 Normally closed Major alarms DCON2 White Port 2 J8 4 Normally closed Major alarms DDON3 Green Port 2 J8 4 Normally closed Major alarms ALARM Orange Port 3 J8 7 Normally Closed
84. 160 Se ee a to on for a DC powered system set to off for an AC powered system Set to on to enable PFTU if equipped during over temperature condition Set to off to disable PFTU during over temperature condition Table 10 SW2 on master total number of slaves in the system Part 1 of 2 How many Switch position How many Switch position slave units 3 4 5 6 7 8 Silaveunits 3 4 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Configuring the system monitor Page 159 of 436 Table 10 SW2 on master total number of slaves in the system Part 2 of 2 How many Switch position How many Switch position slave units 3 4 5 6 7 8 Silaveunits 3 4 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 160 of 436 Configuring the system monitor Table 11 SW2 on slaves total unit number for the slaves Part 1 of 2 Slave unit Switch position Slave unit Switch position address 4 5 6 7 8 address AN OajR WD Ko NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Configuring the system monitor Page 161 of 436 Table 11 SW2 on slaves total unit number for the slaves Part 2 of 2 Slave unit Switch position Slave unit Switch position address 4 5 6 7 8 address 4 5 6 7 8 31 on off off off off off 63 off off off off off off Note Slave addresses are 1 63 End of Procedure Cabling the System Monitor The System Monitor NT8D22 is used to monitor the temperature power supplies and blower unit in a column A serie
85. 1C In this document the following hardware platforms are referred to generically as Server e Call Processor Pentium IV CP PIV e Common Processor Pentium Mobile CP PM e Common Processor Dual Core CP DC e Commercial off the shelf COTS servers IBM x306m server COTS1 HP DL320 G4 server COTS 1 IBM x3350 server COTS2 Dell R300 server COTS2 In this document the generic term COTS refers to all COTS servers The term COTS1 or COTS refers to the specific servers in the preceding list NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 System information Page 31 of 436 Related information This section lists information sources that relate to this document Documents The following documents are referenced in this document Circuit Card Reference NN43001 311 Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 System Security Management NN43001 602 Software Input Output Administration NN43001 611 Telephones and Consoles Description Installation and Operation NN43001 567 Software Input Output System Messages NN43001 712 Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Overview NN43021 110 Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering NN43021 220 CS 1000M and Meridian I Large System Upgrades Overview NN43021 458 CS 1000M and Meridian 1 51C to CS 1000M SG CP PIV Upgrade NN43021 459 CS 1000M and Meridian 1
86. 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 405 of 436 Figure 152 TLAN connection on Ethernet port coupler 10 Fit the Ethernet port adapter plate into the hole on the back of the UEM and tighten the screws See Figure 153 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 406 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Figure 153 Installed Ethernet port adapter plate 11 Attach the ferrite beads to the Ethernet patch cables See Figure 154 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 407 of 436 Figure 154 Attached Ethernet patch cable ferrite beads End of Procedure Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 408 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Connections This section contains information about server connections Connection checklist WARNING Do not modify or use a supplied AC power cord if it is not the correct type required for the host region IMPORTANT Server cards are powered through the backplane of the Media Gateway Universal Equipment Module or Media Gateway cabinet into which they are installed and do not require a power cord Before connecting a Server ensure that you have the following materials on hand Table 65 Connections checklist Do you have A serial cable DTE DTE null modem cable to connect the server to a maintenance terminal The IBM x3350 requires a NTRX26NPE6 9 pin female to 9 pin female null modem cable An NTAK19E
87. 22e7c Initializing new slave device 0x12d22e7c Retrieved old volume params with 80 confidence Volume Parameters FAT type FAT16 sectors per cluster 195 61 FAT copies 0 clusters 50115 sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 15421 hidden 1010580541 FAT sectors 3057015 Root dir entries 15421 sysId null serial number cffbc3c3 Label m CPP4 reboot automatically Mounting cf2 Found cf2 nvram sys Mounting boot Found boot nvram sys Selecting nvram file from 2 Sources Read boot parameters from F Faceplate compact flash H Hard Drive o H Reading boot parameters from boot nvram sys Press any key to stop auto boot NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 299 of 436 The system then enters the Main Menu for keycode authorization MAIN MENU The Software Installation Tool will install or upgrade Communication Server 1000 Software Jatabase and the CP BOOTROM You will be prompted throughout the installation and given the opportunity to quit at any time Please enter KCR gt gt lt u gt To Install menu lt t gt To Tools menu lt q gt Quit Enter Choice gt lt u gt The system searches for available keycode files in the keycode directory on the RMD If no keycode file is found the system displays the following menu Communication Server 1000 Software Database B
88. 253 PFTU connections 153 terminal numbers 250 U universal trunk cards pair terminations 253 unloading equipment 62 upgrading 57 UPS uninterruptible power supplies ground cabling 93 system monitor cabling 167 168 UPS uninterruptible power supply units 156 V V 42 modem standard 183 Index Page 435 of 436 W wire gauge requirements DC power 124 wrist straps 63 X XMI messages 320 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 436 of 436 Index NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013
89. 3021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 215 of 436 Figure 88 Side by side placement of CP PIV Core Net modules Module 3 Module 3 IPE IPE Module 2 Module 2 Network Network Module 1 Module 1 Network Network Module o Ee yeee Teun WARS eetere t kemmo Module 0 Core Net 1 Vs iii Ys lee Core Net 0 i io F hg Column 1 Column 0 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 216 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Checking Core card front side installation All Core cards are factory installed The Core cards front side are 1 NT4N65 cPCI Core Network Interface cCNI cards Each system contains between one and four NT4N65 cCNI cards per Core Net Module The cCNI cards are located in slots c9 c12 If not already installed install a P0605337 cPCI Card Slot Filler Panel to cover any of slots c10 c12 which do not contain cCNIs Note In the NT4N41 Core Net module you must configure port 0 on the NT4N65 Core to Network Interface cCNI Card in slot c9 as Group 0 Commu
90. 5 mm 5 16 in socket wrench 12 7 mm 1 2 in open end wrench for rods 14 3 mm 9 16 in open end wrench for nuts Note The earthquake rods should be installed before you position the columns Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 336 of 436 Installing earthquake bracing Procedure 60 Installing earthquake rods 1 Remove the top cap on each column a Pull forward on the clips underneath the front edge of each air exhaust grill on the top cap Lift up and remove the grill as illustrated in Figure 109 Figure 109 Exhaust grill removal Top Cap Air exhaust grill Air exhaust grill Module Clips 553 5886 b Use a8 mm 5 16 in socket wrench to remove the six screws that secure the top cap see Figure 110 on page 337 Lift the top cap from the column NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing earthquake bracing Page 337 of 436 Figure 110 Top cap assembly Mounting bolts Front of column Screw for LED bracket on perforated panel LED 553 3038 2 Remove the side panels on the exterior of each module by removing the four bolts that secure the panel Note In a two tier or three tier column with adequate ceiling clearance you may be able to thread the rods down the sides of the column without removing the side panels Insert each rod into its hole at the top of the column Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 338 of
91. 6 J17 J37 J38 then with superloop adapter plates J2 J6 J10 J22 J26 J31 Figure 139 on page 387 shows the network card faceplate connectors the I O panel connectors and the cables required Cable the backplane connectors SLO SL1 SL2 SL3 for the controller card to the I O panels on the rear of the IPE Module Label both ends of an NT8D92 cable with the loop number then connect one end of the cable to the backplane connector Mount the connector on the other end of the cable in one of the cutouts in the I O panels The recommended order for connections is SLOtoJ2 SL1toJ3 SL2toJ4 SL3toJ5 Figure 140 on page 388 shows the controller card backplane connectors and the I O panels for the IPE Module Complete the network loop connection see Table 63 on page 382 Connect one end of an NT8D98 cable to the I O panel connector for the network card Connect the other end of the cable to the I O panel connector for the associated controller card Seat and secure all connectors Set the Enb Dis switch on each network card to Enb Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 386 of 436 Cabling network modules and loops 8 During system software configuration use the Software Input Output Administration NN43001 611 to enter loop assignments End of Procedure Figure 138 Installing a superloop adapter plate I O panel ae panel cutout label Superloop adapter ee QPC414 I
92. 61C to CS 1000M SG CP PIV Upgrade NN43021 461 CS 1000M and Meridian I 61C CP PII to CS 1000M SG CP PIV Upgrade NN43021 462 CS 1000M and Meridian 1 61C to CS 1000M MG CP PIV FNF Upgrade NN43021 463 CS 1000M and Meridian I 61C CP PII to CS 1000M MG CP PIV FNF Upgrade NN43021 465 CS 1000M and Meridian 1 CS1000M SG CP PIV to CS 1000M MG CP PIV FNF Upgrade NN43021 466 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 32 of 436 System information CS 1000M and Meridian 1 71 to CS 1000M MG CP PIV FNF Upgrade NN43021 467 CS 1000M and Meridian I 81C IGS to CS 1000M MG CP PIV FNF Upgrade NN43021 471 CS 1000M and Meridian I CS 1000M MG CP PII IGS to CS 1000M MG CP PIV FNF Upgrade NN43021 473 CS 1000M and Meridian I CS 1000M MG CP PII FNF to CS 1000M MG CP PIV FNF Upgrade NN43021 474 Other documentation The following documentation is referenced in this document Candeo Power System User Guide P0914425 Candeo Power System Installation Guide P0914426 Candeo SP 48300 Power System AP6C55AA User Manual P7000154 Candeo SP 48300 Power System AP6C55AA Installation Manual P7000289 Online To access Avaya documentation online click the Documentation link under Support on the Avaya home page Wwww avaya com NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 33 of 436 Introduction Contents Overview This chapter contains information about the following topics PCE Wo 5 oi ohh ORE SURE REE MAS ded e
93. 89 of 436 Figure 30 Multiple column multiple row ground and logic return distribution AC input Large System Common equipment columns Service panel 120 V receptacle IG or CEG Safety ground 6 AWG min Logic return reference TRE 6 AWG AC conduit Large System Peripheral equipment columns Safety Ground Cord or conduit _ 208 240 V receptacles 30 A L6 30 AC conduit or IG L6 30 553 8994 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 90 of 436 Installing AC power Installing safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring Follow Procedure 5 to install safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring Procedure 5 Installing safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring CAUTION Service Interruption System Failure Failure to follow grounding procedures can result in unsafe or faulty equipment See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering NN43021 220 for a complete description of approved ground sources and methods 1 Make sure the power cord is disconnected from the power source Note As a safety precaution disable the circuit of each column at the service panel 2 Remove the air intake grill 3 Using a volt ohm meter measure the resistance between the ground pin on t
94. 8D37 I O panel connectors A E K R Part 1 of 2 Lead designations VOpanelcomnectors VOpanelcomnectors connectors Pair DDI Mode color Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 12 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 259 of 436 Table 40 NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors A E K R Part 2 of 2 Lead designations VOpanelcomnectors VOpanelcomnectors connectors Pair DDI Mode color Slot 12 Unit 6 Table 41 NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors B F L S Part 1 of 3 Lead designations I O panel connectors DDI Mode Pins Slot 13 Slot 13 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 260 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 41 NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors B F L S Part 2 of 3 Lead designations I O panel connectors DDI Mode Pins Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 13 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 261 of 436 Table 41 NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors B F L S Part 3 of 3 Lead designations I O panel connectors DDI Mode Pins T2 46 Slot 10 Slot 14 R2 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 Table 42
95. AFETY WARNING TIE TRUNKS fw Ew 4W E M SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE AC15 TRK I D NO S TO RO T1 R1 2W E M TO TO Ro Ro E M SB SA T1 T1 R1 py EM SB SA 553 6462 Figure 56 Label for Data Access Line Card NT7D16 SAFETY WARNING SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE DATA EQUIPMENT SAFETY WARNING SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE DATA EQUIPMENT 553 6463 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame Page 147 of 436 Figure 57 Label for Power Failure Transfer Unit SAFETY WARNING POWER FAIL TRANSFER UNIT CABLE J1 SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE SAFETY WARNING POWER FAIL TRANSFER UNIT CABLE SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE DO a O o o O EXT LINE coTRK ext LINE coTRK cot CARD CARD CARD CARD TR SAFETY WARNING POWER FAIL TRANSFER UNIT SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE CABLE J1 PFTS r COT 52 52 M N ExT LINE coTRK COT LINE CARD carp EXT carp COTRK carp TOR TRITR It RIT RIT RIT RIT R I R I R 553 6464 Figure 58 Label for Digital Line Card NT8D02 SAFETY WARNING LOOP SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE DIGITAL TELEPHONES DIR NO S 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 T RIT RITR T RIT RIT RET RI T RIT RI T R SAFETY WARNING SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE DIGITAL TELEPHONES DIR NO S 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 T RITR TR T RIT R T RIT R T RIT RIT R 553 6465 La
96. AVAYA Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning Avaya Communication Server 1000 Release 7 6 Document Status Standard Document Version 06 01 Document Number NN43021 310 Date March 2013 AVAYA 2013 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved Notice While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya assumes no liability for any errors Avaya reserves the right to make changes and corrections to the information in this document without the obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes Documentation disclaimer Documentation means information published by Avaya in varying mediums which may include product information operating instructions and performance specifications that Avaya generally makes available to users of its products Documentation does not include marketing materials Avaya shall not be responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya End User agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya Avaya s agents servants and employees against all claims lawsuits demands and judgments arising out of or in connection with subsequent modifications additions or deletions to this documentation to the extent made by End User Li
97. C cable for each CP PM or CP DC card This cable adapts the 50 pin MDF connector on the back of the shelf of the Media Gateway Universal Equipment Module or 11C cabinet to a 25 pin DB connector Shielded CAT5 cables or better to connect the server to the ELAN and TLAN subnets NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 409 of 436 Connecting a Signaling Server This section contains instructions for connecting a Server to the ELAN and TLAN subnet of a CS 1000M system It also contains instructions for connecting a maintenance terminal to the Server A Server card is inserted into a slot of a Universal Equipment Module UEM UEMs do not have built in ELAN and TLAN Ethernet ports You must install Ethernet ports on the back of the UEM to enable the Server to connect to the ELAN and TLAN subnets of your Communication Server 1000 system see Procedure 73 Installing ELAN and TLAN Ethernet ports on the back of a Communication Server 1000M UEM on page 396 Perform Procedure 74 to connect a Server card to the ELAN and TLAN subnets of a Communication Server 1000M system IMPORTANT Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN and TLAN subnets of a CS 1000M system causes a service disruption Procedure 74 Connecting a Server Card to the ELAN and TLAN subnets of a Communication Server 1000M system 1 Insert the end of an RJ 45 CAT5 Ethernet cable not supplied into the ELAN network interface po
98. C power cord if it is not the correct type b Attach the female end of the power cord to the mating AC power receptacle on the right hand side of the server back panel Plug the male end of the AC power cord into the AC power source wall outlet 5 Configure the COM1 serial port as the communication port for the connected maintenance terminal Configure the COM 1 baud rate for the serial port on the server to 9600 b ps See Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 6 Configure the connected maintenance terminal See Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 7 Press the Power switch End of Procedure Maintenance terminal configuration parameters To configure Signaling Server maintenance terminal configuration parameters see the Maintenance chapter of Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 IP subnet configuration CS 1000 Release 7 6 Signaling Servers support IPv6 and IPv4 addresses If the Signaling Server and Call Server reside in different IP subnets you must manually add a route from Base Manager in order for Element Manager to communicate and interact with the Call Server For more information see Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 Upgrading and reconfiguring the software This section contains information and references for upgrad
99. CE modem NT4N90BA Ethernet CP PIV card to I O panel NTRC17BA Crossover Ethernet cable Core to Core customer supplied Standard Ethernet cable I O Panel to LAN switch Note f there is no connection to a LAN connect the two LAN 1 connectors using the NTRC17BA crossover cable Table 21 Factory installed Core cables internal Number required Order Code Description per system NT4N4405 Shelf Power Net backplane to Core backplane NT4N29AA cCNI to 3PE Core Net shelf cable NT4N89AA System Utility Card to XSM see Figure 80 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 198 of 436 Figure 79 Core Net cable connections top view Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system NT4N4405 Shelf Power cable factory installed NT4N89AA System Monitor cable factory installed NT4N29 3PE Cables to Net module factory installed __ 2 z E p amp 5 5 a rr 6 O Eloletlo qe x SlEls o 5 o g S g slflels 5 5 xe eJ 1 sl 8 2 a 2l 3 Y 3 A A zals S a amp i 3 Sjelels 5 o x fale o 5 Es Es Es 8 s1 2 9 is a 7 o ope ye 2 E 7 3 3 3 gs3 Q a Qa 0 EA E EIRE z z 2 z zZilaloa to other Core Net n LAN 2 port LAN 2 cable NTRC17BA CP PIV J31 Ethernet cable from LAN 1 NT4N90BA J25 DTE cable y from COM 1 N NT4N88AA for termina
100. Canada For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Support website http support avaya com Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to securityalerts avaya com Trademarks The trademarks logos and service marks Marks displayed in this site the Documentation and Product s provided by Avaya are the registered or unregistered Marks of Avaya its affiliates or other third parties Users are not permitted to use such Marks without prior written consent from Avaya or such third party which may own the Mark Nothing contained in this site the Documentation and Product s should be construed as granting by implication estoppel or otherwise any license or right in and to the Marks without the express written permission of Avaya or the applicable third party Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya Inc All non Avaya trademarks are the property of their respective owners and Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Downloading documents For the most current versions of documentation see the Avaya Support website http support avaya com Contact Avaya Support See the Avaya Support website http support avaya com for product notices and articles or to report a problem with your Avaya product For a list of support telephone numbers and contact addresses go to the Avaya Support website http support avaya com scroll to the bot
101. Card 512 MB memory N0026096 MMDU replacement faceplate Checking that the Core cards front side are installed All Core cards are factory installed The three Core cards front side are 1 NT4N65 cPCI Core Network Interface cCNI card Each system contains one NT4N65 cCNI card per Core Net module The cCNI cards are located in slot c9 If not already installed install a P605337 cPCI Card Slot Filler Panel to cover slots c10 to c12 which do not contain cCNIs Note In the NT4N41 Core Net module you must configure port 0 on the NT4N65 Core to Network Interface cCNI Card in slot c9 as Group 0 Communication between the bv cCNI and 3PE cards for Group 0 is accomplished by using the NT4N29 cable You require only one cCNI card for Group 0 Note Slots c13 and c14 remain empty If necessary install a P0605337 cPCI Card Slot Filler Panel in each slot NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Page 197 of 436 2 NT4N48 System Utility card The System Utility card is located in slot c15 3 NT4N39AA Call Processor PIV CP PIV This card is located in the slot marked CP Cabling the Core side This section describes installation of the Core cables Table 20 lists field installed cables Table 21 lists factory installed cables Table 20 Field installed Core cables internal Number required Order Code Description per system NT4N88AA COM1 DTE terminal NT4N88BA COM2 D
102. Connecting Core modules toa LAN oc3340 45 ccs4sceeeneeowenes 208 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system 20050e eee ee eee 211 COMI ii erodar d he Ke ee hd r SOs CeukRe seas Seaysave 211 A o E E AL ELTE TTET att peel MAUS c5 2c582ce ea igeoceeatdenes suscatne genes 213 Cabling the Core Net module backplane 4 216 Disconnecting cables from the Core Net module backplane 217 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Contents Page 9 of 436 Optionme the System Witt Card ious oder eiwdeciw rnini issa 219 ore SEM CADNINE hast hi keke dak ogee hdek Bees Soden Redes 220 Installing the CP PIV to I O panel cables 0 224 Connecting the Core module toa LAN 200008 227 Cabling a Dual Ring Fiber Network s00 ss4s0se00080es0000 228 PU cat CABIN nck pei etd NET ES TRETAT TATT 232 Installing the Shelf 0 fiber optic ring ascending 236 Installing the Shelf 1 fiber optic ring descending 237 PUG te PU Cable ket oeeosnweewts Rane tegiukewa eked dicks 239 Connecting the Clock Controller cables n 0sccceanwteeeaceeunes 240 Cabling lines and trunks 0 0055 245 eee eee eee ee eee re ee eT er Tee ee ree 245 D u i tcesipeeeseeaeageoeeestleeeeanretlaredaaseaene 245 Cabling an IPE Module or Media Gateway 247 Connecte liner ane HUNKS ca0ctengdb kde cb esgleeedebarkeys 250 Powering up the system and init
103. D95 cable Dg Rear View Switch box NT8D95 cable Terminal Note The A0377992 switch box can be used in this configuration SDI port on I O panel J25 on DED H 1 0 panel I O panel Core Net0 Core Net 1 NT8D95 cable 553 A0134 March 2013 Connecting a system terminal or modem Page 181 of 436 Connecting a switch box and terminal to SDI and COM1 ports Use Procedure 20 to connect COM ports to a switch box and a terminal see Figure 71 on page 180 and Figure 72 on page 182 Procedure 20 Connecting a switch box and terminal to the SDI and COM1 ports 1 Set the terminal to 9600 baud 7 data space parity one stop bit full duplex XON Connect an NT8D95 cable to the terminal and to the switch box Connect NT8D95 cables to a matching connector on the switch box When using an A0377992 ABCDE box connect CPU 0 to connector A CPU 1 toconnector B The SDI port to connector D connector C is common Connect NT8D95 cables from the switch box to J25 on the I O panel in the rear of each cPCI Core Network Module Connect an NT8D95 cable from the switch box to the I O panel slot for the SDI card To communicate with the system in general set the switch box to the SDI port To communicate directly with a COM1 port switch the cable as needed End of Procedure Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 182 of 436 Connecting a system terminal or modem Figure 72
104. IS OS HR LTA 179 Procedure 20 Connecting a switch box and terminal to the SDI and COM1 POMS 22 cscs cies stabi nerap eda Es a eee sta eeeae x 181 Procedure 21 Configuring a modem 00 cece eee 184 Procedure 22 Connecting a modem to an SDI port 185 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 List of Procedures Page 19 of 436 Procedure 23 Connecting a modem to a switch box COM2 and SDI ports 187 Procedure 24 Installing the CP PIV to I O panel cables 200 Procedure 25 Connecting the Clock Controller cables 203 Procedure 26 Connecting the 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules 204 Procedure 27 Inspecting NT4N29AA factory installed cables 204 Procedure 28 Connecting the Core Net backplanes 206 Procedure 29 Connecting the Core module toaLAN 209 Procedure 30 Cabling the Core Net module backplane 217 Procedure 31 Disconnecting cable connectors from the backplane 218 Procedure 32 Installing the CP PIV to I O panel cables 225 Procedure 33 Connecting the Core module toaLAN 227 Procedure 34 Installing the Shelf 0 fiber optic ring ascending 236 Procedure 35 Installing the Shelf 1 fiber optic ring 237 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 20 of 436 List of Procedures Procedure 36 Connecting the FIJI to FIJI cables 239 Procedure 37 Conne
105. If conduit or other cabling runs through the top cap you must tag and disconnect the cables pull them out of the way and reroute them after the new module and the top cap are positioned Procedure 65 Adding a module to the top of the column 1 Disconnect and remove the NT8D22 System Monitor for the column in the rear of the pedestal do not turn off the blower unit in the front of the pedestals a If the column houses the master system monitor load LD 37 and software disable the associated SDI port LD 37 DIS TTY x disable the device associated with the port b Disconnect the RJ11 cable to J3 then the cable to J6 then pull the system monitor out of the slot 2 Turn off power as necessary e With AC power set the main circuit breaker for the column to OFF down in the rear of the pedestal DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Due to hazardous voltage in AC powered systems power to the entire column must be shut down This shuts down all functions in the column e With DC power set the switch on the module power supply and the circuit breaker in the rear of the pedestal to OFF down for the module being added NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Adding a module to a column Page 359 of 436 3 Disconnect power connections to the top cap a At the top of the rear of the module disconnect the orange power connector from the module power harness see Figure 120 on page 359 Press the four tabs two on each side and l
106. JI to FIJI cabling on page 239 e Connecting the Clock Controller cables on page 240 Figure 95 Dual Ring Fiber Network Group 1 shelf 1 Group 2 shelf 1 Group 3 shelf 1 Tx V1 Tx J1 7 Rx J2 NTRC48xx fiber optic cables 553 9143 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 230 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Required cards Table 30 on page 230 outlines the number of circuit cards required by each system depends on system configuration Table 30 Fiber Network required cards Quantity Order code Description 1 for each Network NTRB33 Fiber Junctor Interface FIJI card module 1 for each Network NTRE39 Optical Cable Management Card OCMC module as needed 8 for each system 4 for NT4N65 Compact Core Network Interface cCNI 2 cards each Core as needed 2 for each system NTRB53 Global Clock Controller cards The CS 1000M MG and Meridian 1 PBX 81C CP PIV support a Fiber Network Fabric network system with a Fiber Junctor Interface FIJI card The double slot FIJI NTRB33AF card resides in slots 8 and 9 on the Net side of the Core Net module The single slot FIJI NTRB33BBE5 card resides in slot 9 on the Net side of the Core Net module The double slot FIJI NTRB33AF card resides in slots 2 and 3 on the Network module The single slot FIJI NTRB33BBES card resides in slo
107. KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKEKKKKKKKKEKEK Select ONE of the SEVEN PSDL files Global 10 Languages Western Europe 10 Languages Eastern Europe 10 Languages Spare Group A L 2 3 4 North America 6 Languages 5 6 Spare Group B 7 Packaged Languages Q uit lt CR gt default By default option 1 will be selected Enter your choice gt x gt Copying new PSDL 17 Successful installation confirmation appears enter lt CR gt to continue Communication Server 1000 Software Database BOOTROM RMD Install Tool Software release xxxx was installed successfully on Core 1 All files were copied from RMD to FMD Please press lt CR gt when ready NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 309 of 436 18 The customer database installation from RMD is employed when upgrading from CP3 and CP4 systems Select option lt a gt Install CUSTOMER database from the database installation main menu Communication Server 1000 Software Database BOOTROM RMD Install Tool You will now perform the database installation Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt Install CUSTOMER database The Removable Media Device containing the customer database must be in the drive lt b gt Install DEFAULT database The System S W media must be in drive lt c gt Transfer the previous system database The floppy disk
108. N43001 311 You can upgrade a CP PM Signaling Server to support the CS 1000 Linux Base and applications for Communication Server 1000 with a CP PM Signaling Server Linux upgrade kit The upgrade kit includes the following components e Linux OS preloaded hard drive kit optional provided if required Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 418 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server e 2 GB Compact Flash CF with Linux software 2 GB blank CF e 1 GB DDR SO DIMM memory upgrade optional provided if required Overview An upgrade of the Signaling Server software consists of the following steps e Back up application databases using Element Manager e Install CS 1000 Linux Base and configure parameters e Use Centralized Deployment manager to deploy and install Signaling Server applications e Configure the system or import backup node files in Element Manager e Use Element Manager to restore backups of application databases Avaya recommends that you back up the application databases before performing the upgrade The application databases consist of the IP Phone database and the NRS database If you do not know whether the Signaling Server being upgraded has an NRS use Procedure 78 Verifying the presence of an NRS on page 419 to make this determination If you have an NRS database on the Signaling Server and want to back it up before performing the upgrade you must use the backup tool in NRS Manager
109. NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors C G M T Part 1 of 3 Lead designations I O panel connectors DDI Mode Pins G M T4 26 W BL Slot 2 Slot 6 Slot 10 Slot 14 Unit 4 R4 1 BL W 27 W O 2 O W T5 28 W G Slot 2 Slot 6 Slot 10 Slot 14 Unit 5 R5 3 G W 29 W BR 4 BR W T6 30 W S Slot 2 Slot 6 Slot 10 Slot 14 Unit 6 R6 5 S W 31 R BL 6 BL R Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 262 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 42 NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors C G M T Part 2 of 3 Lead designations I O panel connectors DDI Mode Pins G M T7 32 Slot 10 Slot 14 R7 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 Slot 11 Slot 15 11 37 12 38 Slot 11 Slot 15 13 39 14 40 Slot 11 Slot 15 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 Slot 11 19 45 20 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 263 of 436 Table 42 NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors C G M T Part 3 of 3 Lead designations I O panel connectors DDI Mode Pins G M T6 46 Slot 11 Slot 15 R6 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 Table 43 NT5K18 Flexible Central Office Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors A E K R Part 1 of 2 Lead designations I O panel connectors COT Pins K Slot 12 Slot 12 Large Sy
110. OOTROM RMD Install Tool No keycode files are available on the removable media Please replace the RMD containing the keycode file s Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt RMD is now in the drive lt q gt Quit Enter choice gt Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 300 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading At this point either replace the RMD or quit the installation If you select option lt q gt Quit the system requires confirmation Communication Server 1000 Software Database BOOTROM RMD Install Tool You selected to quit Please confirm Please enter lt CR gt gt lt y gt Yes quit lt n gt No DON T quit Enter choice gt If y quit is selected the system prints INST0127 Keycode file is corrupted Check Keycode file and returns to the installation main menu After accessing the RMD containing the valid keycode s press lt CR gt The system displays the keycode file s available as in the following example The following keycode files are available on the removable media Name Size Date Time KCR gt gt lt 1 gt keycode kcd 1114 Jan 17 2005 15 31 K2 gt KCport60430m kcd 1114 Feb 24 2005 13 43 Kq gt Quit Enter choice gt 2 Note A maximum of 20 keycode files can be stored under the keycode directory on the RMD The keycode files must have the
111. OTS server that provides signaling interfaces to the IP network using software components that operate on the Linux Base operating system You can install the Signaling Server in a load sharing redundant configuration for high scalability and reliability The following software components can operate on the Signaling Server e IP Line Terminal Proxy Server LTPS e SIP H 323 Gateway Signaling software e Network Routing Service NRS optionally redundant e SIP Line Gateway software stand alone only e Element Manager Web server e Application Server for Personal Directory Redial List and Callers List for UNIStim IP Phones The Signaling Server is an application server that can host various co resident Signaling Server applications SIP Line Gateway software cannot co reside with any other signaling software A server configured with a SIP Line Gateway can be referred to as a SIP Line Server The CP PM Signaling Server is housed in the system chassis The COTS Signaling Server is mounted on an external rack see Figure 12 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Figure 12 Preparing for installation Page 57 of 436 CS 1000M Large System Group 1 shat 1 loops 48 1063 Group 2 shat 1 loops 60 to g5 Grap 3 shalt 1 Group 4 shett 1 Group 5 shelf 1 Group 6 shelf 1 Group 7 shelf loops 11210 127 loops 144 to 159 loops 176 to 191 cops 208 to 223 loops 240 to 255
112. PPLICABLE TO ANYONE WHO DOWNLOADS USES AND OR INSTALLS AVAYA SOFTWARE PURCHASED FROM AVAYA INC ANY AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER AS APPLICABLE UNDER A COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT WITH AVAYA OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY AVAYA IN WRITING AVAYA DOES NOT EXTEND THIS LICENSE IF THE SOFTWARE WAS OBTAINED FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN AVAYA AN AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AVAYA AUTHORIZED RESELLER AVAYA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO TAKE LEGAL ACTION AGAINST YOU AND ANYONE ELSE USING OR SELLING THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT A LICENSE BY INSTALLING DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR AUTHORIZING OTHERS TO DO SO YOU ON BEHALF OF YOURSELF AND THE ENTITY FOR WHOM YOU ARE INSTALLING DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO INTERCHANGEABLY AS YOU AND END USER AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND CREATE A BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND AVAYA INC OR THE APPLICABLE AVAYA AFFILIATE AVAYA Heritage Nortel Software Heritage Nortel Software means the software that was acquired by Avaya as part of its purchase of the Nortel Enterprise Solutions Business in December 2009 The Heritage Nortel Software currently available for license from Avaya is the software contained within the list of Heritage Nortel Products located at http support avaya com licenseinfo under the link Heritage Nortel Products For Heritage Nortel Software Avaya grants Customer a license to use Heri
113. Procedure 11 Installing the BIX cross connect terminal 1 Refer to the equipment layout plan to determine where to place the cross connect terminal 2 Lay out the terminal blocks as shown in Figure 51 on page 141 3 Attach labels on the cross connect terminal to indicate the terminal blocks assigned to the following e 25 pair cables from the system e AUX wiring e Power Failure Transfer Units PFTU e Telephones and consoles e Trunks e Miscellaneous equipment End of Procedure Figure 49 Typical BIX cross connect terminal layout Standard backplane cabling White background A tra tA tAltaltalralta talralralralralralralre sp a of1 f2 s3 4 5 6 71 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 DARA ROR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 rd 8 9 Expanded backplane cabling White background TRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITR A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 FA 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 i PP RONE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 pid TRITR TRITR TRITRITAR 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 TR 10 TR 10 TR RITRITRITRITRITRITRITRITR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 140 of 436 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame
114. RNIA OSHPD e BELLCORE is intended for central office equipment installations The requirements are defined in the Network Equipment Building System NEBS General Equipment Requirements TR EOP 000063 issued by Bell Communications Research BELLCORE Each Large System has been certified to meet the maximum severity Zone 4 e CALIFORNIA OSHPD as part of the California building code requires the anchorage of all fixed hospital equipment to be approved by the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development OSHPD Division of Facilities Development and Financing Each Large System has been certified for such installations under anchorage pre approval number R 0233 Installing seismic bracing involves 1 Selecting the kit on page 329 Drilling concrete floors on page 331 2 3 Installing Kit A and Kit B anchor plates on page 333 4 Installing earthquake rods on page 335 5 Positioning and leveling the system on page 341 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing earthquake bracing Page 329 of 436 Selecting the kit To select the applicable bracing and anchorage kits for your particular installation you must first determine the following site requirements e Identify system configuration number of columns and modules per column e Identify specification requirements BELLCORE or CALIFORNIA OSHPD e Determine site mounting floor parameters this information can usually b
115. S Cable R Cable M N Cable L VAA Cable K MO N a i Cable G a Cable F o N 2 N Cable E N ack O A Cable C Cable B V _ HO QUV OQVHAOQNHAOQHAoOYNHoQgHoqgHoynHoquHoyg a Cable A 2 Pair 553 6459 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 144 of 436 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame Figure 53 CE PE module card allocation Krone cross connect system Pair Pair 17 24 16 Cable K V N Cable G 17 24 9 16 Cable F 1 8 17 24 9 16 Cable E 1 8 17 24 9 16 Cable C 1 8 17 24 9 a Cable B 1 8 as 17 24 9 o Cable A 1 8 a Pair Pair en Labels Terminating strips on the Krone cross connect must be labeled if they contain wiring The labels that attach to the terminating strips have two sides the front side shows the card name and card number and the reverse side flip up side shows pair designations for that card NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame Page 145 of 436 There are two types of mandatory labels those with safety warnings and those without Mandatory labels with safety warnings are required for the following cards e NT5K02 analog line card e NT5K19 analog tie trunk card e QUA6 Power Failure Transfer Unit PFTU Labels are mandatory for th
116. SS SSS SSStSSSSSSSq4 SSSSSSSS IPMG Software no install for rel XXXXX Option Choice Status Comment SSSS SSS SSS SSSSSSS4 S SS SS SS St SSSSSSSq4 SSSSSSSS DATABASE yes l l Option Choice Status Comment SSSS SSS SSS SSS SSS SfS SSS SSS StS SSS SSSS4 SSSSSSSS CP BOOTROM yes NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 307 of 436 Enter lt CR gt to confirm and continue install ation Please enter KCR gt gt lt y gt Yes start installation lt n gt No stop installation Return to the Main Menu Enter choice gt gt Checking system configuration You selected to install Software release XXXX on the new system This will create all necessary directories and pre allocate files on the hard disk You may continue with software install or quit mow and leave your software unchanged Please enter KCR gt gt lt a gt Continue with new system install lt q gt Quit Enter choice gt Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 308 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading 16 The PSDL files menu appears Enter the appropriate choice for the site s geographic location AK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKD SDL INSTALLATION MENU The PSDL contains the loadware for all downloadable cards in the system and loadware for M3900 series Sets KAEKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKEK KKK
117. Server e Obtain the CS 1000 Release 7 6 version of the Signaling Server Software Install media For details see Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 e Ensure that there is 2 GB of RAM and at least 40 GB of hard drive capacity on your CP PM or COTS Signaling Server Upgrade the CP PM BIOS The NTDW66CAE6 CP PM card CP PM version 2 does not require a BIOS upgrade The CP PM version 2 uses an updated design BIOS and boot manager Older NTDW66 CP PM cards CP PM version 1 might require a BIOS upgrade to support Linux The Communication Server 1000 Linux Platform Base installer requires that a CP PM version 1 card runs BIOS version 18 or higher If the installer detects a lower version on the CP PM card it automatically loads software for you to upgrade the CP PM BIOS Perform the steps in Procedure 79 to upgrade the CP PM BIOS to version 18 For information about manually upgrading the CP PM BIOS with VxWorks software see Avaya Communications Server 1000E Maintenance NN43041 700 Procedure 79 Upgrading the CP PM BIOS with the CS 1000 Linux Base installer 1 Connect to serial port 1 on the CP PM 2 Insert the CS 1000 Linux Base installation CF card into the faceplate CF slot 3 Power on the system 4 Once the initial boot and memory check completes for a CP PM version 1 card Figure 162 appears Press the F key to boot from the CS 1000 Linux Base installation faceplate CF ca
118. Server 1000 system Server card hardware installation This section contains instructions for installing a Server in a Communication Server 1000M system The Communication Server 1000M system supports the NTDW66 CP PM card NTDW54 CP DC card and Comercial off the shelf COTS servers NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 395 of 436 This section contains only general instructions to install the Server card in Communication Server 1000M systems For more detailed installation instructions see Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 IMPORTANT There are several switches on CP PM circuit cards All switch settings must be factory defaults except for the switch labelled S5 Switch S5 must be in position 2 to support the internal hard drive used on the CP PM Signaling Server circuit card Installation in a Communication Server 1000M system For CP PM cards the first task that you must perform is to install the hard drive shipped with the server or Linux upgrade kit For instructions see Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 The NTDW66 CP PM card and NTDW54 CP DC card are double wide faceplate cards designed for use ina CS 1000M Universal Equipment Module UEM You can insert the double wide CP PM or CP DC card into any slot of a CS 1000M UEM except slot 7 When upgrading from a CS 1000M sy
119. Standard 06 01 March 2013 Adding a module to a column Page 361 of 436 Figure 123 Top cap assembly Mounting bolts Top cap Front of column Screw for LED bracket on perforated panel LED 553 3038 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 362 of 436 Adding a module to a column 5 Position and secure the module being added a Locate the positioning guides on the module in the column see Figure 124 on page 362 Make sure the module being added is facing the same direction as the column Figure 124 Module positioning guides Positioning guides Opening for cables 553 3056 b Place the module being added on top of the column and adjust it until it is seated securely on the positioning guides c Use a 14 3 mm 9 16 in socket wrench to secure the module with five mounting bolts see Figure 125 on page 363 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Adding a module to a column Page 363 of 436 Figure 125 Module mounting bolts i as Mounting bolts 553 3057 6 Connect the power and system monitor cables between modules a Connect the power connectors between the module being added and the module below it see Figure 126 on page 364 b Connect the system monitor cable from connector J2 in the lower module to J1 in the module being added see Figure 126 on page 364 Large System Install
120. a Communication Server 5100 e CallPilot 703t server e Hospitality Messaging Server 400 e Media Processing Server 500 e Media Processing Server 1000 AM ERECTA WU FODEICCUERCKAY RTT EWF ACT FT FREOMAIL PRM ACHAT TRV ETA Phin ELH MAC TEA CTES USA th FRE dh DRO PB me EHC 7R SD EB AP WEFR KRORALRZIEMHOVET HHn TBO EVE BO BMS PAHO RE ARICA LZR VCC ESV bale oF SHAFT IE HEP KERALA FAO RA LRAILEMOVET IFAR ZARRA HL F141 0032 WKE AML T A 11 a2 P hYF A RKA AbFD 9F TEL 03 5740 1300 2 http www nortel com jp Page 65 of 436 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 66 of 436 Preparing for installation Preparing the equipment for installation Use the equipment room floor plan to position equipment See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian I Large System Planning and Engineering NN43021 220 to prepare the equipment room and floor plan WARNING A fully loaded column weighs 275 kg 606 Ib More than one person is required to remove equipment from shipping pallets WARNING Module covers are not hinged do not let go of the cover Lift the cover away from the module and set it out of the work area Procedure 1 Preparing the equipment for installation 1 Remove equipment from the shipping pallets follow the unpacking instructions that come with the packaging material 2 Remove the front and rear covers from each module NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Prepa
121. aceplate CF is referred to as the Removable Media Disk RMD See Figure 10 on page 54 and Figure 11 on page 55 e 512 MBytes of DRAM memory NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Preparing for installation Page 53 of 436 New system types There are two new system types for CP PIV e 3521 Meridian 1 Option 61C and CS 1000M SG e 3621 Meridian 1 Option 81C and CS 1000M MG Avaya CS 1000E New hardware CP PIV features the following new hardware e ACP PIV processor board See Figure 10 on page 54 side view and Figure 11 on page 55 front view e A blank panel to fill the gap and ensure proper air flow direction Note The front panel USB port on the CP PIV card is reserved for future applications Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 54 of 436 Preparing for installation Figure 10 CP PIV call processor card side Fixed Media if Drive FMD NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Preparing for installation Page 55 of 436 Figure 11 CP PIV call processor card front Removable Media Drive RMD Lan 1 USB Port COM 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 56 of 436 Preparing for installation Signaling Server CS 1000M systems use a Signaling Server The Signaling Server provides a central processor to drive the signaling for IP Phones and IP Peer Networking The Signaling Server is a Common Processor Pentium Mobile CP PM circuit card or a Commercial off the shelf C
122. afety ground protective earth and logic return wiring A separate safety ground protective earth connection is required The safety ground protective earth wire must be 6 AWG or larger It must connect the pedestal to the single point ground SPG Using an isolated ground IG bus as the single point ground is recommended To fulfill this function Avaya offers the NT6D5304 Logic Return Equalizer LRE equipped with nine terminations A large ground bar NT6D5303 equipped with 48 terminations is also available An AC equipment ground ACEG bus in the service panel or transformer is acceptable but not recommended If used the ACEG bus conductor must be a low impedance path to an approved source for ground It must not contain induced electrical noise from sources such as building metallic structures building steel metallic conduit metal pipes etc Figures 28 29 and 30 beginning on page 87 show an ACEG as the single point ground Depending on the distances between columns the location of the service panel and the availability of panel SPG connection points safety ground protective earth wiring can be daisy chained or run independently from each column to the service panel Figures 29 and Figure 30 show safety ground protective earth wiring in daisy chain configurations For more information about approved ground sources and methods see Communication Server 1000M and Meridian I Large System Planning and Engineering NN43021 220
123. age 194 2 Reviewing required Core cards on page 196 3 Checking that the Core cards front side are installed on page 196 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 194 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Reviewing Core Net module placement Core Net modules can be installed side by side on top of separate pedestals see Figure 77 for power and cooling redundancy or in a stacked configuration see Figure 78 in a single column Core Net 1 is always on the left Core Net 0 is always on the right Figure 77 Stacked configuration of Core Net modules 553 AAA0757 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Page 195 of 436 Figure 78 Side by side configuration of Core Net modules oa ninin N HRI j 012 ja jefe o 1 3 5 7 0 eae 553 AAA0756 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 196 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Reviewing required Core cards All Core cards are installed in the factory See Table 19 for the Core card requirements for each Core Net module For module and card descriptions see System equipment UEMs on page 42 Table 19 Required Core cards minimum per Core Net module Number required per Backplane Description Core Net module side NT4N65 cCNI cPCI Core Network Interface Card NT4N48 System Utility Card NT4N39AA CP PIV Call Processor
124. ains power cooling and system monitoring equipment e A Power Distribution Unit PDU in the back of the pedestal supplies either AC or DC power to the column NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Preparing for installation Page 43 of 436 A System Monitor checks the column s cooling and power systems A blower unit accessible from the front of the pedestal forces air up through the modules to cool the circuit cards Figure 2 Universal Equipment Modules Module 3 Module 2 Module 1 Module 0 4 tier column Sa ASY stal 1 ter column 553 AAA1241 Top caps A top cap is mounted on the top module of each column It contains Air exhaust grills in the cap that release air from the blowers in the pedestal A heat sensor that monitors the temperature of the column Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 44 of 436 Preparing for installation e Ared LED in the front of the cap s exhaust grill that lights if the system overheats or if a power outage occurs e Ladder racks for routing cables can also be fitted to the top caps Modules Up to four modules can be included in a column The modules can include e NT4N41 CompactPCI cCPI Core Network Module required for all Large Systems e NT8D35 Network Module required for Meridian 1 Option 81C and CS 1000M MG e NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment IPE Module required for all Large Systems
125. akers Note If only two modules are used in the column make sure the CB2 and CB3 circuit breakers are set to OFF b Connect the black wires to the ground bus LRE c Connect the orange or white wire to the ground bus LRE NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 131 of 436 10 Replace the metal safety cover over the terminal block on the PDU a Lower the front panel over the mounting screws on the PDU b Tighten the screws holding the cover 11 Replace the power plant cover 12 Replace the junction box cover Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 132 of 436 Installing DC power Figure 47 PDU to Large Candeo connections Distribution 500 With Battery Connection Kit Common Ground Busbar Rtn Battery Load Clips Bat 30 Amp Bre kers JB on System Manager J4 Alarme Bat Bat f Bat f Bat J Rtn f Rin f Rin f Rin f Lin 0 1 2 3 0 4 2 3 Batto Load Clips Rtn to Busbar 553 AAA0760 End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 133 of 436 Connecting UK power to the Four Feed PDU To connect the external power system to the pedestal use the following procedure for each column this procedure gives the connections for a four module column Note All wiring to the PDU must be routed within the cable tie saddles and under the cable restraint bar at the base of the pedestal Proc
126. allation and Commissioning Page 38 of 436 Introduction 11 Connect a system terminal or modem go to Connecting a system terminal or modem on page 175 12 Install cabling Tocable Common Equipment go to Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system on page 191 Tocable network loops go to Cabling network modules and loops on page 367 To cable IPE Modules to the MDF and to connect lines and trunks go to Cabling lines and trunks on page 245 13 Power up the system and load the system software go to Powering up 14 15 16 the system and initial loading on page 283 Note If you upgrade your current system do not install new software Instead return to the upgrade procedures in Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrade NTPs NN43021 458 to 474 Perform acceptance tests go to Performing acceptance tests on page 319 To test circuit cards see Acceptance tests in Circuit Card Reference NN43001 311 To test telephones and attendant consoles see Telephones and Consoles Description Installation and Operation NN43001 567 Replace all covers and grills on the front and rear of the system NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Introduction Page 39 of 436 Table 2 List of tasks in subsections Preparing for installation Placing the fourth module on a column Positioning and leveling equipment Installing overhead cable
127. ation and Commissioning Page 364 of 436 Adding a module to a column Figure 126 Module to module power and system monitor connections I O safety panel Power connectors between modules System monitor connectors I O safety panel Rear view 553 5152 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Adding a module to a column Page 365 of 436 7 Install the perforated panel and top cap on the module being added a Position the perforated panel and slide it slightly to the right at the rear Install the screw that secures the panel and LED bracket b Position wiring from the perforated panel so it rests in the cable well located next to the orange power connector at the rear of the module see Figure 127 on page 365 Figure 127 Cable well location Cable well Orange connector Top of module N Bracket View at rear of module 553 5889 c Position the top cap and install the bolts that secure it d Replace the air exhaust grills at the front and rear of the top cap 8 Reconnect power to the top cap a Connect the system monitor cable to J2 on the backplane Line up the alignment tab on the connector and snap on the pin headers to position the connector correctly see Figure 128 on page 365 Figure 128 Monitor cable J2 backplane alignment tab and key alignment Alignment tab on backplane Key on cable connector h connector ri Side view of connectors
128. ation and Commissioning Page 392 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Readiness checklist Before installing a Signaling Server in a Communication Server 1000 system complete the following checklist WARNING Do not modify or use a supplied AC power cord if it is not the exact type required in the region where you install and use the Signaling Server Be sure to replace the cord with the correct type NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 393 of 436 Table 64 Readiness checklist Part 1 of 2 Read all safety instructions in Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning NN43021 310 as appropriate for your Communication Server 1000 system Do you have all equipment and peripherals For COTS servers e installation accessories for rack mounting the server e AC power cord e aDTE DTE null modem cable supplied NTE90672 Linux Signaling Server software DVD for COTS servers For Server cards NTDW66 CP PM and NTDW54 CP DC e CP PM only CP PM Signaling Server Linux Upgrade kit which includes Linux OS preloaded hard drive kit Optional provided if required 2 GB Compact Flash CF with Linux software 2 GB blank CF CP PM 1 GB DDR SO DIMM memory upgrade Optional provided if required 2 GB required CP DC 2 x 2 GB memory upgrade 4 GB required for Communication Server 1000 Release 7 6 2 port SDI Cable assembly kit Large System Cab
129. awee hy ene 33 Avaya Communication Server 1000 task flow 34 SUMUNALY Ol procedis 56s s ede Reese eee REESE SRS aE 37 WARNING Before a Large System can be installed a network assessment must be performed and the network must be VolIP ready If the minimum VoIP network requirements are not met the system will not operate properly For information about the minimum VoIP network requirements and converging a data network with VoIP see Converging the Data Network with VoIP NN43001 260 This document describes the procedures used to install and configure a Large System For proper installation perform the steps in the sequence stated in Summary of procedures The summary will refer you to other sections within this document After completing the steps listed in those sections return to the summary and continue on to the next step Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 34 of 436 Introduction Whenever possible install external power equipment before the system installation If reserve power equipment is used install it according to the manufacturer s instructions To install telephones and attendant consoles see Telephones and Consoles Description Installation and Operation NN43001 567 System installation must be performed by qualified personnel only Upgrade and New Install Wizards The Upgrade and New Install Wizards components of the Health Check Tool are introduced
130. ay Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 208 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Connecting Core modules to a LAN Connect each Core Net module to a local area network LAN This connection provides a communication channel for LAN based systems management tools such as Element Manager This connection also supplies additional redundancy capabilities See Figure 86 on page 210 Note 1 If a LAN is not available connect the second NTRC17BA crossover Ethernet cable included in the basic package between the J31 ports in Core Net 0 and Core Net 1 Note 2 The Core Net I O panel cables must be installed as described on Cabling the I O panel on page 199 before the Ethernet connections can be completed NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Page 209 of 436 Figure 85 CP PIV to I O panel connections Core shelf front of module I O Panel C rear of module ore O J23 J22 J21J200 NTRE40AA Ethernet Adapter LAN 1 c9 c10 c11 c12 c13c14 NTRC17BA NT4N88BA modem core to core fi NT4N90BA LAN switch NT4N88AA terminal 553 9466 Procedure 29 Connecting the Core module to a LAN 1 2 Label both sides of two customer supplied Ethernet cabl
131. ay kits Cable trays also called ladder racks can hang from a ceiling or they can be mounted across the tops of the columns If ceiling hung racks are used the rear top cap grill on each column must be replaced with a Top Cap Cable Egress Panel P0699851 The optional Top Cap Egress Panel has cutouts for cable routing The cable trays and the equipment required to hang them must be provided by the customer and installed according to the manufacturer s instructions Avaya offers an NT8D63 Overhead Cable Tray Kit which provides equipment for mounting cable trays on four tier columns The kit includes two support brackets and front and rear exhaust grills with cutouts for cable routing The cable tray itself must be provided by the customer it is not included in the kit Use Procedure 4 on page 82 to install the NT8D63 kit Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 82 of 436 Installing overhead cable tray kits CAUTION Service Interruption System Failure Column frames must be insulated from contact with building structures such as concrete walls floors and ceilings Whether the cable racks are column mounted or ceiling hung the installation must maintain the integrity of the grounding architecture Procedure 4 Installing the overhead cable tray kits 1 Remove air exhaust grills at the front and rear of the top cap Pull forward on the two clips underneath the front edge of each grill and lift up to remove the g
132. ble see the following list from connector J4 on the system monitor in the column with CPU 0 the master system monitor to the associated UPS Table 13 gives the pin assignments and signal descriptions for the alarm cables Fora Best Inc UPS use an NT8D46AJ alarm cable Foran Exide UPS use an NT8D46AQ alarm cable Foran Alpha UPS use an NT8D46AU alarm cable Connect the cable to the UPS as specified by the manufacturer Repeat this step for each system monitor with an associated UPS see Figure 68 on page 168 Table 13 NT8D22 System Monitor pin assignments at J4 Signal description Not used Not used Not used Not used Alarm 1 AC fail to UPS Alarm 1 return Alarm 2 Power sense from UPS Alarm 2 return Not used Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 168 of 436 Configuring the system monitor Figure 68 UPS alarm cabling Large System columns J4 on system monitor J4 on system mdnitor UPS alarm cable UPS for each column 553 3088 8 ForDC powered systems extend the alarm and trip leads from connector J4 on the system monitor in the column with CPU 0 the master system monitor to the external power equipment using an NT8D46AV cable see Table 14 on page 169 Note 1 Conduit is not required Note 2 An NT8D46BV cable 19 5 m 64 ft or NT8D46CV cable 30 m 100 ft can be used instead of the NT8D46AV cable Connections are the same as the NT8D46AV cabl
133. bling lines andtrunks Page 279 of 436 Table 56 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M 4 Wire Type 1 connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors B F L S Part 1 of 2 Lead designations I O panel connectors Type 1 mode Pins Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 13 Note The cable pair designated TA TB is the transmit pair The pair designated RA RB is the receive pair Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 280 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 56 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M 4 Wire Type 1 connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors B F L S Part 2 of 2 Lead designations I O panel connectors Type 1 mode Pins Slot 10 Slot 14 Note The cable pair designated TA TB is the transmit pair The pair designated RA RB is the receive pair NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 281 of 436 Table 57 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M AC15 trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors A E K R Lead designations I O panel connectors Type 1 mode Pins K Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 12 Note The cable pair designated TA TB is the transmit pair The pair designated RA RB is the receive pair Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 282 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 58 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M AC15 Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors B F L S Lead designations I O panel connectors Typ
134. cards in each Network Shelf 1 in descending order Figure 100 on page 238 Procedure 35 Installing the Shelf 1 fiber optic ring 1 Start with the Tx J1 port in Group 0 Shelf 1 2 Connect a NTRC48xx FIJI Fiber Ring Cable of the appropriate length from the Tx J1 port of the FIJI card in Group 0 Shelf 1 to the Rx J2 port of the FIJI card in the highest Network group Shelf 1 This is the longest NTRC48xx cable that came with the shipment 3 Connect a NTRC48xx cable from the Tx J1 port of the FIJI card from the Tx J1 port in the highest Network group Shelf 1 to the Rx J2 port in the second highest Network group Shelf 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 238 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system 4 Continue to connect NTRC48xx FIJI Fiber Ring Cables of the appropriate length from the Tx J1 port to the Rx J2 port in Shelf 1 of each Network group Connect these cables in descending order of Network groups 5 To complete the ring connect a final cable from Tx in Group 1 Shelf 1 to Rx in Group 0 Shelf 1 Figure 100 Shelf 1 fiber optic ring on a 4 group machine Shelf 1 fiber optic ring Group 1 shelf 1 Group 2 shelf 1 Group 3 shelf 1 Tx J1 Tx J1 Rx J2 a lt Rx Ea i J3 J3 i sii si J4 Group 1 shelf 0 Group 3 shelf 0 Tx J1 Tx
135. ciated with the PFTU to OFF The major alarm condition displayed on attendant consoles associated with the PFTU should disappear Repeat step 2 and step 3 for each attendant console associated with the PFTU Set the line transfer switch on the PFTU to BYPASS and test the telephones and trunks connected to the PFTU e Place an outgoing call from each telephone associated with the PFTU Each telephone should be connected directly to a trunk e Place an incoming call on each trunk associated with the PFTU Each trunk should be connected directly to a telephone Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 326 of 436 Performing acceptance tests 7 Set the line transfer switch on the PFTU to NORMAL and test the telephones and trunks connected to the PFTU The telephones and trunks associated with the PFTU should return to normal operation End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 327 of 436 Installing earthquake bracing Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Seismic approved applications 0 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 327 Tastalling seismig bracing 34 24 05 be 6 RS hk sabe SESeS SSSR AOE S 328 Drilling concrete MOGs c44 94600520 ee Re ROR a Se eS 331 Installing Kit A and Kit B anchor plates 0 333 Tastalling carthiguake dise rir oireen irtenen hikin 335 Positioning and leveling the system s0 0ser v reece eee aws 341 Installing non
136. ciscs i ses0akadbaks 228 BU Chet CaO ocin ieee eae sie AEA REENA ARRESTA 232 Installing the Shelf O fiber optic ring ascending 236 Installing the Shelf 1 fiber optic ring descending 237 PUD PU Caplin escritores Ara ATERA EROE EAER 239 Connecting the Clock Controller cables resesi sirserossesosias 240 Cabling guidelines The NT4N41 Core Net module backplane see Figure 87 on page 213 like all circuit boards has a primary side and a secondary side The primary side Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 212 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system which faces the front of the module contains the primary shrouds which provide mechanical guidance for the pins of the card edge connectors The secondary side of the backplane which faces the rear of the module contains the secondary shrouds which provide mechanical guidance for cable connectors When routing cCNI to 3PE cables store any excess cable length near the associated Network module Do not store excess cable in the Core Net module Because the cable troughs and spaces on the sides of a module are within the EMI shielding of the system unshielded cables can be routed in those areas As space permits Common Equipment cables can be routed horizontally in the cable troughs at the front rear and sides of the module or vertically on the sides of the module Note In a DC powered module because there is no MPDU
137. contains information about the following topics OME cb bie he LEE RA SHARE AME a CERES oR SSD RE ERM RS 347 Adding a module to the base of acolumn 348 Adding a module between two other modules 354 Adding a module to the top of acolumn 4 358 The procedures in this chapter apply to adding a module to a column that is fully equipped and powered up To add a fourth module to a column during initial system installation see the procedure for placing the fourth module on a column in Preparing for installation on page 41 CAUTION Service Interruption Damage to Equipment A module containing the system CPU Common Equipment cards should never be installed at the third or the fourth tier of a column Modules containing Common Equipment should always be installed in the bottom two tiers of Large System columns This ensures optimum cooling for the Common Equipment cards Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 348 of 436 Adding a module to a column A module can be added to a column in one of three positions A specific procedure is provided for each situation e Adding a module to the base of a column on page 348 e Adding a module between two other modules on page 354 e Adding a module to the top of a column on page 358 If the column is equipped with earthquake bracing the column support rods must be removed and longer rods must be install
138. cted to COM1 on Call Server 1 Insert the RMD into the Compact Flash card slot Press the manual RESET button on the CP PIV card faceplate Press lt CR gt at the Install Tool Menu Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 294 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading 5 The system attempts to validate and format the FMD partitions The following format will occur only if the on board 1 GByte FMD is blank Obtaining and checking system configuration gt Validate hard disk partitions Validate number of hard drive partitions and size Number of partitions 0 Disk check failed three partitions expected INST0010 Unable to validate Hard disk partition j r errNo 0xd0001 Please press lt CR gt when ready INST0010 Unable to validate Hard disk partition p Please press lt CR gt when ready INSTO010 Unable to validate Hard disk partition Je Please press lt CR gt when ready NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 295 of 436 The Fix Media Device on Core 0 is blank PARTITION IT Install cannot continue unless the FMD is partitioned Note INSTALL WILL REBOOT AFTER THIS PROCEDURE AND FIX MEDIA WILL BE EMPTY AFTER YOU INSTALL REMOVABLE MEDIA MUST BE IN THE DRIVE AT THIS TIME Please enter KCR gt gt Enter choice gt
139. cting the Clock Controller cables 241 Procedure 38 Cabling an IPE Module NT8D37 or Media Gateway 248 Procedure 39 Connecting lines and trunks 0000eeeeee 250 Procedure 40 Installing the Security Device 005 284 Procedure 41 Preparing to power up AC 2 00 e cence eee 286 Procedure 42 Option 1 Using the installed power plug recommended 286 Procedure 43 Option 2 Hard wiring the power connections optional 287 Procedure 44 Turning AC power On 200s e eee eee 287 Procedure 45 Resetting the main circuit breakers AC power 288 Procedure 46 Preparing to power up DC 200 cece eens 290 Procedure 47 Turning DC power ON 20 22 cee eee eee eee 291 Procedure 48 Installing the software 00 cece ee eee eee 293 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 List of Procedures Page 21 of 436 Procedure 49 Testing Core Net 1 20 cece cece eee ees 314 Procedure 50 Switching call processing 200 eeeeeees 316 Procedure 51 Testing Core Net0 0 00 c eee eee 317 Procedure 52 Testing module power supply 200 eee0es 320 Procedure 53 Testing blower unit and thermal sensor 321 Procedure 54 SySload TOG osar nap hase ieee ebace cutessecaaeas 323 Procedure 55 Testing system terminal and system monitor 324 Procedure 56 Testing the PFTU and its interface 325 Pr
140. d DC powered versions System architecture and module types are described in Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Overview NN43021 110 The components of AC powered systems DC powered systems and reserve power options for both are described in this document Meridian 1 Option 61C and CS 1000M SG These systems feature a dual Pentium Processor with standby processing capability fully redundant memory and a full network group Two Core Net modules and one IPE module are the minimum installation requirements Additional IPE modules and application modules can be used The modules are stacked see Figure 6 on page 50 or installed side by side see Figure 7 on page 50 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 50 of 436 Preparing for installation Figure 6 Meridian 1 Option 61C stacked configuration Core Net 0 Main column 553 5960 Figure 7 Meridian 1 Option 61C side by side configuration SS TA 7 cee j i i IPE E IPE IPE IPE IPE IPE Core Net1 Core NetO Column 1 Column 2 563 5962 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Preparing for installation Page 51 of 436 Meridian 1 Option 81C and CS 1000M MG These systems feature a dual Pentium Processor with standby processing capability two Core Net modules installed side by side and two or more network groups The Core Net modules provide the first network group and network module pairs provide additional ne
141. ded in the Software that may contain software including open source software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which contain terms regarding the rights to use certain portions of the Software Third Party Terms Information regarding distributed Linux OS source code for those Products that have distributed Linux OS source code and identifying the copyright holders of the Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply is available in the Documentation or on Avaya s website at http support avaya com Copyright You agree to the Third Party Terms for any such Third Party Components Note to Service Provider The Product may use Third Party Components that have Third Party Terms that do not allow hosting and may need to be independently licensed for such purpose Preventing Toll Fraud Toll Fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example a person who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on Fraud associated with your system and that if Toll Fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services Avaya Toll Fraud intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by Toll Fraud and you need technical assistance or support call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 for the United States and
142. designating a Main Distribution Frame Installing the Krone cross connect system UK In the Krone cross connect system one terminating strip holds ten pairs of cable When cross connecting a 25 pair cable on this system eight of the ten terminating points are used on each strip One 25 pair cable therefore occupies three terminating strips 8 pairs per strip by 3 strips 24 pairs Card allocations Figures 52 and 53 provide module card allocations for the Krone cross connect system Procedure 12 describes how to install the Krone Test Jack Frame for the UK Procedure 12 Installing the Krone Test Jack Frame UK 1 Refer to the equipment layout plan to determine where to place the cross connect terminal 2 Lay out the terminal blocks 3 Attach labels on the cross connect terminal to indicate the terminal blocks assigned to the following e Analog line cards e DC15 AC15 RAN PAG cards e Data Access cards e AUX wiring e Power Failure Transfer Units e Digital line cards e Telephones e Exchange line trunk cards e Direct Dialing Inward trunk cards e Miscellaneous equipment End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame Page 143 of 436 Figure 52 IPE module card allocation Krone cross connect system Pair Pair 17 Card 15 Card 14 Card 13 ee ee Card 12 a ane Card 7 Card 4 N 16 Cable T ONnNn O NO Cable
143. dule 4 Replace the module covers End of Procedure Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 74 of 436 Placing the fourth module on a column NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 75 of 436 Positioning and leveling equipment Contents This chapter contains information about the following topic Positioning and leveling the equipment 4 T3 Positioning and leveling the equipment Columns normally stand on adjustable feet that provide leveling capability and ground isolation However casters are available and can be used for two tier columns If a third module is added to a column with casters the casters must be replaced with leveling feet Note If earthquake bracing is required go to Installing earthquake bracing on page 327 to install column and floor bracing and to position and level equipment When those procedures are complete return to Step 4 or Step 5 as applicable in the initial installation procedure Use Procedure 3 to position and level the equipment Procedure 3 Positioning and leveling the equipment 1 Check the equipment room floor plan to position columns 2 Levelthe column a Remove the front and rear exhaust grills b Remove the front and rear air intake grills Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 76 of 436 Positioning and leveling equipment c Position a level across the top module cover on the front of the column d Loosen the lockin
144. e NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Configuring the system monitor Page 169 of 436 Table 14 Alarm and trip lead connections NT8D46AV Cable Connection at control and distribution panel Description Terminal block No Pwr Sys Alarm Name Alarm TB2 Position 6 Low Float DCON 0 TB4 Position 8 Rectifier Fail Alarm DCON 1 TB5 Position 2 Major Alarm DCON 2 TB5 Position 2 Major Alarm DCON 3 TB5 Position 2 Major Alarm Connect the red white and green wires together at MJA Alarm interfacing to Candeo The Candeo interfaces with the system through the Candeo s System Manager alarm output ports The alarm cable for the Candeo NT8D46xx interfaces from the connector J4 of the System Monitor NT8D22xx located in the Large System pedestal to the Candeo s System Manager alarm output ports The Candeo s System Manager can be accessed in several ways to monitor the operating status and the alarms on the system view and modify the operating parameters and download configuration files and software upgrades e local access by means of the display and buttons on the front of the unit by means of the web browser on computer connected locally into the RJ 45 network interface through a crossover CATS Ethernet cable Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 170 of 436 Configuring the system monitor remote access by means of the web browser on a computer connected through a dial up network conn
145. e Core Equipment Peripheral Equipment IP Network Interfaces Engineered Values Emergency Services Geographic Redundancy Software Customers Routes and Trunks Routes and Trunks D Channels Digital Trunk Interface Dialing and Numbering Plans Electronic Switched Network Flexible Code Restriction Incoming Digit Translation Phones Templates Reports Views Lists Properties Migration Tanla Installing a Signaling Server Initially you can be prompted to enter the Call Server IP address because the Call Server is used for web logon authorization The Call Server IP address is a requirement because unless you entered additional configuration parameters during the Signaling Server installation the node configuration data file containing the Call Server IP address does not yet exist 3 Enter a Level 1 or Level 2 user ID and password If configured you can also use a Limited Access Password LAPW user ID and password If this is the first time the Call Server is accessed the default Level 1 or Level 2 user ID and password must be used If the logon is successful the Element Manager Home System Overview screen appears see Figure 160 on page 420 CS1000 Element Manager A Managing 192 168 209 127 Username admin System Overview System Overview IP Address 192 168 209 127 Type Avaya Communication Server 1000E CPPM Linux Version 4121 Release 750K NN43021 310
146. e 1 mode Pins TA Slot 13 TB RA RB TA Slot 13 TB RA RB TA TB RA RB TA Slot 13 TB RA RB TA Slot 10 Slot 14 TB RA RB TA Slot 10 Slot 14 TB RA RB Note The cable pair designated TA TB is the transmit pair The pair designated RA RB is the receive pair NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 283 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading Contents Overview This chapter contains information about the following topics OVE W 5 suis CG eRe eee be niee Menno unb brew meow Aenea mae 283 listalling the Security Deve u 0 440s 4 yo ineni ser dere enone 283 Preparing t power Up AC csie spies bukra akis iageiieds beds 286 Connecting the AC power SOUIGE 226 0c cider scdoesedaerieaussan 286 Turning AC power ON 3 4 0 i6c o00asdis es geneva eee thee eee 287 Resetting the main circuit breakers AC power 288 Preparing te power Up DC coca s geese Gene berarnedan arenes 290 T rning DC power ON 40to 0 coun s iiser Arik A EA 290 Tistalling sona 4s ccc cie kona deca oie sicaad teks sieead bake 292 This section describes how to power up and initialize a Large System and install new software Installing the Security Device The Security Device Figure 106 on page 285 resembles a large watch battery and is shipped with the software package This device along with the Keycode Installation diskette enables the features for each individual system Large Sy
147. e 33 Connecting the Core module to a LAN 1 2 Label both sides of two customer supplied Ethernet cables Connect a CAT5 Ethernet cable from J31 top on the Core Net 0 I O panel to the LAN switch Connect a second CAT5 Ethernet cable from J31 top on the Core Net 1 I O panel to the LAN switch Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 228 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Figure 94 Options for LAN 1 connections Systems with a LAN switch Systems without a LAN switch 1 Connect LAN 1 to J31 Connect J31 to J31 2 Connect J31 to LAN swite Rear of module Core Net 0 Core Net 1 Avaya supplied NTRC17BA crossover ethernet cable Customer supplied Ethernet cables End of Procedure Cabling a Dual Ring Fiber Network The FIJI cards in the Network modules are connected to form a Dual Ring Fiber Network This allows calls to be routed between Network groups The Fiber Network consists of two separate rings one ring connects all the Network Shelf Os while the second ring connects all the Network Shelf 1s NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 229 of 436 Figure 95 on page 229 Four steps are required to configure the Fiber Network e Installing the Shelf 0 fiber optic ring ascending on page 236 e Installing the Shelf 1 fiber optic ring descending on page 237 e FI
148. e Core Net modules 373 Connecting the 3PE cables to the 3PE fanout panels 378 Cabling a Superloop Network Card single column 380 Cabling a Superloop Network Card multiple columns 384 Network to network cabling Cabling between NT8D35 Network Modules interconnects the two half groups to build a full network group The first full group is located in the Core Network module together with the CPU The maximum length of the interconnecting cables between the two modules is 0 6 m 2 ft The two half group network modules must therefore be stacked on top of one another The cables are then routed from the backplane of one module to the backplane of the other through the vertical holes in the rear horizontal cable trough of the modules Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 368 of 436 Cabling network modules and loops Network module connections Each multi group system contains between two and eight Network groups Group 0 is contained in the Core Net modules Groups 1 through 7 are contained in the Network modules Each Network group is comprised of two Network shelves Shelf 0 and Shelf 1 Network Group 0 Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 The Core Net modules contain Network Group 0 Shelf 0 is in Core Net 0 Shelf 1 is in Core Net 1 Shelf 0 must be connected to Shelf 1 for Network Group 0 to operate correctly Connecting network Group 0 Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 involves 1 Connecting t
149. e System Installation and Commissioning Page 106 of 436 Installing DC power capacity of the supplementary shelf is 180 A six rectifiers delivering 30 A each but the sixth rectifier is for N 1 redundancy and kicks in only if one of the other rectifiers fails System Manager SP The System Manager SP is the advanced controller available with the Candeo SP power systems The operational features of the System Manager SP are as follows e graphical LCD screen e local alarm display by means of LED indicators e eight programmable alarm outputs dry C contacts with Minor Major and Observation being the factory defaults for outputs 1 2 and 3 e eight programmable alarm inputs e several processed alarms e alarms and events history files e alarm management e built in web server e Ethernet LAN and modem RS 232 access e four levels of access security one hardware and four passwords e battery database e temperature compensation e voltage boost equalize e battery discharge test e charge control e delivered DC power calculation e CAN protocol communication with up to 30 modules e maintenance of an inventory of the units in the system e field replaceable without interruption of the rectifiers NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 107 of 436 e remote or local access PSTN GSM EEM TCP IP SNMP e local and remote Graphical User Interface GUI with multi language compatibility
150. e following cards but they do not need safety warnings e NT5K18 Exchange line card e NT5K17 Direct Dial Inwards DDI card Figure 54 through to Figure 60 show labels for the Krone cross connect system Figure 54 Label for Analog Line Card SAFETY WARNING LOOP SHELF SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE ANALOGUE TELEPHONES CARD DIR NO S 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TRilrraltRitaRlrralr alr Rit RIT RITR SAFETY WARNING LOOP SHELF SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE ANALOGUE TELEPHONES CARD DIR NO S 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 TR TR TR TR T R T R T R T R T rite SAFETY WARNING LOOP SHELF SEE INSTRUCTIONS FoR USE ANALOGUE TELEPHONES CARD DIR NO S 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TRIit R TR TR T R T R T eit eit Rit R 553 6461 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 146 of 436 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame Figure 55 Label for Analog Tie Trunk Card SAFETY WARNING TIE TRUNKS 2WEM SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE AC15 TO RO T1 R1 TO To RO Ro E M ISB SA T1 T1 R1R1 E M SB SA 2W E M SAFETY WARNING TIE TRUNKS WE SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE AC15 T2 R2 T3 R3 T2 T2 po p gt E M SB SA T3 T3 R3 R3 E M sB sa 2VEM S
151. e found in the engineering building drawings concrete type hardrock or lightweight aggregate minimum concrete compressive strength megapascals or psi minimum concrete thickness First choose the appropriate module bracing kit using Table 59 on page 329 Select a separate kit for each column of modules For column expansion when an additional module is added to a column which already contains seismic bracing use the expansion bracing kit Table 59 Seismic Bracing Kits Seismic Bracing Kit System configuration NT8D64CD 1 module NT8D64CA 2 modules NT8D64CB 3 modules NT8D64CC 4 modules NT8D64BD expansion Note The NT8D64CD kit contains neither bracing rods nor tie bars because these are not needed for single module installations The NT8D64BD kit does not contain mounting plates as these are not needed for column expansion Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 330 of 436 Installing earthquake bracing Next each column must also be secured to the floor This is accomplished by installing one of two available anchor kits Select the anchor kit by comparing the site requirements to Table 60 on page 330 This table shows that either anchor kit can be used to meet the CALIFORNIA OSHPD specification but only Kit B meets the BELLCORE specification For those installations where neither specification is required Kit A is recommended due to its shallower concrete requirement Both anchor kits can be
152. e power configuration External power distribution AC input l l l l UPS bypass I er a l CS 1000M Large System switch 208 240 V ac Service panel Receptacle and cord or conduit to pedestal s AC DC DC AC Converter Inverter Battery bank UPS may be inside UPS Note The ac safety ground green wire must route from the service panel through the UPS to the Large System panel or receptacles 553 3163A Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 94 of 436 Installing AC power Procedure 6 Installing the UPS ground cabling CAUTION Service Interruption Damage to Equipment Take care when connecting battery leads to the UPS A battery reversal can result in severe damage to the UPS 1 Make sure the safety ground protective earth wire is connected on all Large System columns 2 Daisy chain ground cables to each UPS see Figure 35 using 6 AWG wire 3 Daisy chain ground cables to each bypass switch if equipped using 6 AWG wire 4 Runa 6 AWG wire between the ground lug on the rear of the pedestal the bypass switch and the UPS to a common frame ground point 5 Runa 6 AWG wire between the common ground point and the ground bus in the service panel End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing AC power Page 95 of 436 Figure 35 UPS grounding diagram
153. econfiguring the software 416 This chapter contains general instructions to install and connect Server card hardware This chapter also contains general instructions to connect Commercial off the shelf COTS servers The Avaya Communication Server 1000M Avaya CS 1000M system supports the Common Processor Pentium Mobile CP PM card model NTDW66 the Common Processor Dual Core CP DC model NTDW54 and the Commercial off the shelf COTS servers Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 390 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server A CP PM CP DC or COTS server that you deploy with Signaling Server applications is referred to as a Signaling Server A CP PM or COTS server that you deploy with SIP Line can be referred to as a SIP Line Gateway IMPORTANT Instructions to install an IBM X306m IBM x3350 or HP DL320 G4 or Dell R300 COTS server are not included in this chapter Detailed installation instructions are in the IBM xSeries 306m User Guide IBM x3350 User Guide HP ProLiant DL320 Generation 4 Server User Guide or the Dell PowerEdge R300 User Guide shipped with the server Signaling Server task flow This section provides a high level task flow for the installation or upgrade of an Avaya Communication Server 1000 Avaya CS 1000 system The task flow indicates the recommended sequence of events to follow when configuring a system and provides the document number that contains the detailed procedur
154. ection into the RS 232 port using an external modem by means of the web browser on a computer connected remotely through a LAN or WAN network connection into the RJ 45 network interface Monitoring alarms allows the Large System to report conditions such as low float voltage major alarms and AC fail alarms Customers have the option of customizing these alarms through the Candeo System Manager and can define what major or minor alarms they wish to monitor In addition the Small Candeo provides SNMP functionality The Large Candeo System Manager produces a Major Alarm for the following faults High voltage shut down HVSD High voltage HV Battery on discharge BOD Low voltage LV Low voltage disconnect LVD Alarm busy supply ABSF Internal fuse alarm INT FA Fuse alarm FA Rectifier fail alarm RFA The Small Candeo SP48300 System Manager produces a Major Alarm for the following faults Battery fuse alarm High battery temperature High voltage shutdown HVSD NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Configuring the system monitor Page 171 of 436 e Main AC fail e Rectifier fail major RFA major e Low voltage disconnect LVD e High voltage HV e Fuse alarm FA e Priority low voltage disconnect e AC input over voltage e Rectifier AC fail e Remote shutdown e System Manager SP fail e Configuration fail e Battery on discharge BOD e Low voltage LV e Very high battery temperature Table
155. ects from 9 0 J4 to Note Group 0 cables NT4N29 connect the fanout panel directly to the network backplane of Core Net 1 Figure 82 3PE faceplate connections NT8D80AZ cable Net Core Net Core z 7 gt JHH A RP ogogo 6 2 8 F f s a s o 8 8 8 o s 2 2 2 i g s jal al 2 SE 8 al S lal fal al ETs al e 2 EUI pe 5 E 5 BIS E 3 3 E PS 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ft eo 0e ci2ct3c1i4ci5 cP PS 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Q 10 91 eo ctocttci2ctact4cis cP NT8DB0AZ cable 553 9123 3pe_r26revised End of Procedure Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 206 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Connecting the Core Net backplanes The Shelf 0 and Shelf 1 backplanes must be connected with two NT8D99AD cables Core Net modules only Procedure 28 Connecting the Core Net backplanes 1 Connect one NT8D99AD cable from the E port in Core Net 0 to the E port in Core Net 1 2 Connect a second NT8D99AD cable from the D port in Core Net 0 to the D port in Core Net 1 See Figure 83 Figure 83 Connecting the Core Net backplanes Network backplane System Montior XSM connections P P Core backplane J J 8B ol a
156. ed after the module is added To change the rods see Installing earthquake bracing on page 327 WARNING A fully loaded module weighs approximately 60 kg 130 Ibs More than one person is required to move a module DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK In a DC powered system power to the column can remain on during the following procedures In an AC powered system however power to the entire column must be shut down throughout the procedures Adding a module to the base of a column If conduit or other cabling runs through modules that are being moved you must tag and disconnect the cables pull them out of the modules and reroute them after all of the modules are repositioned The top cap can remain on the module to which it is attached NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Adding a module to a column Page 349 of 436 Procedure 63 Adding a module to the base of a column 1 Disconnect and remove the NT8D22 System Monitor for the column in the rear of the pedestal do not turn off the blower unit in the front of the pedestals a If the column houses the master system monitor load LD 37 and software disable the associated SDI port LD 37 DIS TTY x disable the device associated with the port b Disconnect the RJ11 cable to J3 then the cable to J6 then pull the system monitor out of the slot 2 Set all circuit breakers in the rear of the pedestal to OFF down 3 Remove the module above the pedestal a Disconnect
157. edure 10 Connecting UK power to the Four Feed PDU 1 2 Open the front door of the 8B 2R or 8B 4R master power cabinet If a junction box is used insert the conduit from the junction box into one of the conduit access holes in the pedestal Connect the wires from the junction box to the matching connections on the terminal block on the PDU a Connect the red wires BAT 0 BAT 1 BAT 2 and BAT 3 b Connect the black wires BATRTN 0 BATRTN 1 BATRTN 2 and BATRTN 3 c Connect the remaining LRTN wire orange or white wire Note If a junction box is used the connections described in Steps 2 through 4 apply to the junction box rather than the pedestal Connect the red BAT 48 V wires a At the 8B 2R or 8B 4R master power cabinet connect wires to the terminals on the ve distribution rail see Figure 47 on page 132 b At the PDU connect the wires to the terminal block i Connect module 0 to BAT 0 ii Connect module 1 to BAT 1 iii Connect module 2 to BAT 2 iv Connect module 3 to BAT 3 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 134 of 436 Installing DC power 4 Connect the black BATRTN 48 V wires a At the 8B 2R or 8B 4R master power cabinet connect wires to the ve bus b At the PDU connect the wires to the terminal block i Connect modules 0 to BATRTN 0 ii Connect modules 1 to BATRTN 1 iii Connect modules 2 to BATRTN 2 iv Connect modu
158. ee Figure 88 on page 215 This chapter contains instructions on how to configure the Core side of the CP PIV Core Net modules To configure the Network side of the Core Net modules follow the instructions in Cabling network modules and loops on page 367 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 214 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Reviewing Core Net module placement Core Net modules are installed side by side on top of separate pedestals for power and cooling redundancy Core Net 1 is always on the left Core Net 0 is always on the right see Figure 88 on page 215 Reviewing required Core cards All Core cards are installed in the factory See Table 26 on page 214 for the Core card requirements for each Core Net module For module and card descriptions see System equipment UEMs on page 42 Table 26 Required Core cards minimum per Core Net module Number required per Backplane Order Code Description Core Net module side NT4N65 cCNI cPCI Core Network Interface 1 to 4 front Card NT4N48 System Utility Card 1 front NT4N39AA CP PIV Call Processor Card 1 front 512 MB memory N0026096 MMDU blank faceplate 1 front Note 1 Each cCNI card supports two Network groups The number of cCNI cards in each system depends on the number of Network groups installed in the system See the System Layout plan to determine the number and placement of cCNI cards NN4
159. em connections 183 186 187 189 190 system terminal connections 178 179 181 CP PIV 52 CPU modules placement as bottom modules 57 cross connecting wire 250 CS 1000M MG 49 CS 1000M SG 49 D DC direct current power systems 97 safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring 113 127 DCE data communication equipment 177 DC power 156 dispatch modems 183 DTE data terminal equipment 177 E E amp M trunk cards pair terminations 254 earthquake bracing 327 anchor plate installation 333 floor drilling 331 kit selection 329 positioning and leveling 341 rod installation 335 339 EMI shielding 61 module additions 351 superloop cards 380 384 equipment room floor plans 66 external alarm cabling 165 F field wiring kits and terminals PDU connections 125 floor drilling for anchor bolts 331 floor plans 66 fourth modules 69 G gaskets bracing rod installation 340 spacer kits 76 GFCI ground fault circuit interrupt devices 85 global PDU 98 grills 67 ground protective earth AC power 86 90 DC power 113 127 UPS 93 ground start feature 153 l IG isolated ground bus 86 IG L6 30 receptacles 85 installing QUA6 PFTU UK 154 insulated ground wire 128 T O panels backplane connections 246 247 IPE module connections 249 superloop cabling 385 387 388 system terminal connections 175 IPE modules backplane slots 142 cable connections 245 249 li
160. emoval of shims if necessary If the installation must meet CALIFORNIA OSHPD tension proof load testing is required on 50 of the anchor bolts These anchors must be tested to 24 020 N 5400 Ib tension and 122 J 90 ft lb torque Any failure requires testing of all remaining anchors Go to Installing earthquake rods on page 335 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 334 of 436 Installing earthquake bracing Figure 108 Mounting plate installation Pedestal Anchor holes Mounting plate Adapter bushing Anchor bolt 553 6071 End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing earthquake bracing Page 335 of 436 Procedure 59 Installing Kit B 1 Locate the two mounting plates for each column over the anchor holes Insert the anchors into the holes and tap the anchors into place with a mallet Level the plates with shims Leave the stack of shims exposed until all leveling has been completed this will allow the addition or removal of shims if necessary If the installation must meet CALIFORNIA OSHPD tension proof load testing is required on 50 of the anchor bolts These anchors must be tested to 6230 N 1400 Ib tension and 122 J 90 ft Ib torque Any failure requires testing of all remaining anchors Go to Installing earthquake rods on page 335 End of Procedure Installing earthquake rods The following tools are required to install the rods 7
161. eo power system which comes in 51 1275 mm and 84 2100 mm racks delivers up to 300 A Note 3 Batteries may be installed in two optional battery trays located under the rectifier shelves connection NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 121 of 436 Four Feed PDU The Four Feed PDU NT4N49AA supports independent power feeds to each of four modules in a stack if required However in a typical installation where independent power feeds are not required two jumper wires are provided to jumper adjacent battery leads When the jumper wires are used the four wire PDU effectively provides the same shared power configuration provided by the existing DC PDU Therefore the new PDU is backward compatible and can replace an existing PDU unit in a stack if required Figure 41 Standard two feed wiring NTaNeO Ala A a a ta aA e e e ce Cable tie saddle Cable restraint bar Cable tie saddle 553 AAA0467 The NT4N49AA DC PDU e supports four input circuits implemented through the following terminal configuration four negative battery leads four return leads and logic return lead e is fully backward compatible with the existing PDU it is replacing e supports independent power feeds to each of four modules Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 122 of 436 Installing DC power The four breakers one for each module in the existing DC PDU NT4NS0AA are rated at 18
162. er dumb mode command recognition OFF command echo OFF 4 Atthe local end connect an NT8D95 cable to the SDI port on the I O panel in the rear of the module and to the modem 5 Atthe local end connect the cable from the modem to an RJ11 telephone jack If a cable is required connect an NT8D46 cable to the modem and to the RJ11 jack 6 To communicate with a COM2 port switch the cable from the modem to the port as needed e For debugging or monitoring connect the cable to the active CPU at J21 on the I O panel in the rear of the cPCI Core Network Module e For patch downloading connect the cable to the inactive CPU at J21 on the I O panel in the rear of the cPCI Core Network Module End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Connecting a system terminal or modem Page 187 of 436 Figure 73 Modem to SDI port RJ11 Smart mode jack modem Terminal Modem cable RS 232 M or NT8D46 cable Remote end Public phone lt a lt a f network D gt lt I D gt lt I RJ11 Dumb mode SDI port on jack modem 1 0 panel D gt lt q nn SSS Network module Modem cable NT8D95 E a Ta or NT8D46 cable Rear View Note The A0381391 modem can be used in this configuration 553 A0136 Connecting a modem to switch box COM2 ports SDI ports Use Procedure 23 to connec
163. er power cord a Check that the power cord is the type required in the region where you use the server Do not modify or use the supplied AC power cord if it is not the correct type b Attach the female end of the power cord to the mating AC power receptacle on the server back panel Plug the male end of the AC power cord into the AC power source wall outlet Set the baud rate for the serial port on the server to 9600 b ps See Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 Note The IBM X306m Signaling Server ships with the serial port configured to 9600 b ps Configure the connected maintenance terminal See Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 Press the Power switch Note For more information about operating information see the IBM User Guide for your IBM server End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 413 of 436 Connecting an HP COTS server In geographic regions that are susceptible to electrical storms Avaya recommends that you plug the HP server into an AC surge suppressor Figure 157 shows the rear view of the HP DL320 G4 server Figure 157 HP DL320 G4 rear view igabit Ethene NIC 1 ELAN Note When you perform Procedure 76 Connecting an HP COTS server on page 413 see Figure 157 Procedure 76 Connecting an HP COTS server 1 Connect the
164. er solution Based upon modular building blocks rectifiers System Manager DC distribution and battery connection modules the system is designed to power 48 V DC applications The Candeo platform can be expanded by adding rectifiers battery connection modules frames and distribution modules There are two types of Candeo systems e Large Candeo MP481200 which uses 50 A rectifiers and has a capacity of 1000 A e Small Candeo SP48300 which uses 30 A rectifiers and has a capacity of 300 A NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 99 of 436 Both Large and Small Candeo systems provide plug and walk away installation and setup The platform can be reconfigured or expanded while it remains online Installation and maintenance benefits include e fully front accessible e for Large Candeo shelfless rectifiers e automatic alarms and rectifier configuration settings e no inter module wiring e all hot insertable modules e all internal bussing e fully insulated environment e high efficiency e IP ready for simplified internet connectivity e HTML based graphical user interface e automated web based maintenance and comprehensive on screen troubleshooting e for Small Candeo only Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP communication functionality e remote access via modem or Ethernet permitting remote operation of the power system e intelligent backbone simultaneously carrying DC po
165. erver RSA public key is added to the authorized key file This verification prevents third party intercepts When a mutually trusted SSH tunnel establishes a connection to a CS 1000 device the UCM Primary Security Server can send SSH remote commands to the device using RSA public key based authentication For more information about joining the UCM security domain see Avaya Security Management NN43001 604 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Index Numerics 500 2500 type telephones 153 A A0367916 Auxiliary 48V Power Supplies 149 152 A0377992 ABCD Switches system terminal connections 177 A0377992 Black Box ABCDE Switches modem connections 188 system terminal connections 181 ABCDE Switches system terminal connections 177 AC alternating current power systems safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring 86 UPS ground cabling 93 acceptance tests blower units 321 module power supplies 319 PFTU 325 sysload 323 system terminal and system monitor 324 thermal sensors 321 alarms PFTU connections 150 system monitor cabling 165 anchor bolts floor drilling for 331 Page 429 of 436 anchor kit selection 329 330 anchor plate installation 333 antistatic bags 63 automatic ground start 153 auxiliary 48V power supplies 149 152 backplanes cable expansion 142 connectors 245 T O panel connections 246 247 superloop cabling 385 battery power 156 baud rates system moni
166. es Connect a CAT5 Ethernet cable from J31 top on the Core Net 0 I O panel to the LAN switch Connect a second CAT5 Ethernet cable from J31 top on the Core Net 1 I O panel to the LAN switch Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 210 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Figure 86 Options for LAN 1 connections Systems with a LAN switch Systems without a LAN 1 Connect LAN 1 to J31 Connect LAN 1 faceplate 2 Connect J31 to LAN awitch to LAN 1 faceplate _ Bear of mos of module Core Net 0 Avaya supplied NTRC1744 crossover Ethemet cable Customer supplied Ethernet cables End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 211 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics CODING BINGCNINGS occ 5 caer eens woke RaweoRI eee SA eRe eee 211 Corse Net modules 6 oc oc roth eee d Shi bow Tere Ra Ew EIS 213 Cabling the Core Net module backplane 216 Disconnecting cables from the Core Net module backplane 217 Optioning the System Utility Card sss 5 4602 0k este eerew arson 219 Core shelt cabling v2 yekrgintrorktra taitrorikg as kesine keas 220 Installing the CP PIV to I O panel cables 0 0 224 Connecting the Core module to a LAN 0s02 80se0essaweusees 227 Cabling a Dual Ring Fiber Network iccs
167. es required for the task For more information refer to the following documents which are referenced in Figure 141 on page 391 e Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 e Avaya Element Manager System Administration NN43001 632 e Avaya Signaling Server IP Line Applications Fundamentals NN3001 125 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 391 of 436 Figure 141 Signaling Server task flow CS 1000 Network Start x Back up databases Establish UCM Deployment Server and Primary Security Server NN43001 315 Build software library and provide keycodes NN43001 315 Define pre deployment strategy and commit 4 NN43001 315 Deploy applications to servers with bootable Linux media or patched release 6 0 Signaling Server Servers Back up databases Linux Server VxWorks Call Server Install Linux Base bootable Network Services media on server l NN43001 315 IM Presence y Define pre deployment MAS strategy and commit to NRS Signaling Server Subscriber Manager NN43001 315 CS 1000 Systems Deploy to server with bootable Linux media or patched CS 1000 release 6 0 CS 1000 HS NN43001 315 Signaling Server Configure Signaling Server NN43001 315 1 NN43001 125 Manage Souutly Associate Element Manager NN43001 604 to Call Server i NN43001 632 Large System Install
168. et the connector fall loose into the module below Figure 120 Orange power connector removal tab locations Push here Orange connector Push here 553 5888 b Disconnect the system monitor cable at connector J2 on the backplane 4 Remove the top cap and perforated panel For countries other than the UK pull forward on the clips underneath the front edge of each air exhaust grill on the top cap Lift up and remove the grill as illustrated in Figure 121 on page 359 Figure 121 Air exhaust grill removal TOP cap Air exhaust grill Air exhaust grill Module Clips 553 5886 In the UK the front and rear air exhaust grills are secured by Southco fasteners located underneath the front edge of the grill Use a 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 360 of 436 Adding a module to a column Phillips head screwdriver and turn the fasteners 1 4 turn to release or secure the grill see Figure 122 on page 360 Figure 122 UK air exhaust grill removal Top cap Air exhaust grill UEM 1 4 turn fasteners 553 7375 Air exhaust grill e Use a 8 mm 5 16 in socket wrench to remove the six bolts that secure the top cap see Figure 123 on page 361 Remove the top cap from the column e Remove the screw that secures the perforated panel and LED bracket Slide the panel slightly to the left looking at it from the rear of the column and remove it NN43021 310
169. for local access or a modem for remote access must remain permanently connected to an SDI port to provide a constant I O interface to the system see Figure 69 on page 176 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 176 of 436 Connecting a system terminal or modem Figure 69 Terminal connection diagram Terminal NT8D95AJ To remote terminal cable to 2 or 4 wire loop SDI port During the initial installation of a dual CPU system you may want to temporarily install additional terminals for split mode monitoring or programming or both Note Ina Large System I O ports on the Call Processing CP cards can be used to monitor CPU operations These configurations should not be used as the permanent I O connection for the system because the port is only active when the associated CPU or CP card is active NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Connecting a system terminal or modem Page 177 of 436 Connecting a terminal During the system installation and for continuing system operation a terminal must be connected to an SDI port in a network slot to provide an I O interface to the active CPU in the system for local access In addition a data terminal equipment DTE port COM1 and a data communication equipment DCE port COM2 on the Call Processor Pentium IV CP PIV card can be used for direct access of the cPCI Core Network Module Typically the CP card port
170. form a redundancy sanity test LD 135 Load program STAT CPU Get status of CPU and memory TEST CPU Test CPU Check the LCD states NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 315 of 436 a Perform a visual check of the LCDs b Test LCDs LD 135 Load program TEST LCDs Test LCDs DSPL ALL Test the System Utility cards and the cCNI cards LD 135 Load program STATSUTL Get the status of the System Utility card TEST SUTL Test the System Utility card STAT CNIcs_ Get status of cCNI cards core slot TEST CNIcs_ Test cCNI core slot Test system redundancy LD 137 Load program TEST RDUN Test redundancy DATA RDUN Test database integrity STAT FMD Status of one or both Fixed Media Devices FMD STAT RMD Status of one or both Removable Media Devices RMD Install the two system monitors Test that the system monitors are working LD 37 Load program ENL TTY x Enable the XMS where x system XMS STAT XSM Check the system monitors EREE Exit program Clear the display and minor alarms on both Cores LD 135 Load program CDSP Clear displays on the cores CMAJ Clear major alarms CMIN ALL Clear minor alarms Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 316 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading 7 Test the clocks a Verify that the clock controller is assigned to the active Core LD 60 Load program SSCK x Get status of the clock controllers x is 0
171. g a Superloop Network Card single column 380 Cabling a Superloop Network Card multiple columns 384 Installing a Signaling Server 389 COMEN 164s Ei aOR OSEE ROSES EAE RSET E STR EEE REIRES 389 rodic o 058 ccadtor coe eos eehreadsesgevisgaedpe bedded 389 pignaling server task TOW s cog tbody teond besgdbidwd beeder us 390 Readmess Cheki ccc 2ce2inestactenheeginedte eee edakeeaetee 392 Server card hardware installation 00 00 0000 00 0000 394 ee eee eee eee ere er eer TETT 408 Upgrading and reconfiguring the software 416 Wie Ghisd Saou ceecgadeuetiberseeecersiagas 429 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 12 of 436 Contents NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 13 of 436 New in this release Features Other This chapter contains information about Avaya Communication Server 1000 Release 7 6 new features There are no updates to the feature descriptions in this document See the following sections for information about changes that are not feature related Revision history March 2013 April 2012 March 2012 Standard 06 01 This document is up issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 7 6 It includes updated task flows for CS 1000M and Signaling Server upgrades Standard 05 05 This document is up issued to include information about the surge suppression cable for certain COT and DDI trunk cards Standard 05
172. g nuts on the feet e Adjust the feet on each pedestal up or down to level the column f Perform step a to step e for leveling the rear of the system g Tighten the locking nuts Note Leave at least 12 5 mm 1 2 in between the floor and the bottom of the pedestal for air flow required by the blower unit 3 For a multiple column system install NT8D49 Spacer Kits between columns Remove the front and rear module covers b Remove the front and rear intake grills if not already removed c Remove the trim plates from the module side where the spacer will be attached by removing the four screws securing the trim plates to the module d Remove the side panel from the module s side where the spacer is being attached by removing the four screws securing the side panel to the module e Attach gaskets to both sides in the front section of each spacer see Figure 23 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Figure 23 Positioning spacer gaskets Positioning and leveling equipment Page 77 of 436 Gasket placement Rear Front ae 553 5641 f Attach a spacer to one side of each module except the end column see Figures 24 and 25 Position a spacer against the module Insert one standoff between the spacer and module Insert the one screw and tighten Repeat the process for the remaining standoff and screws CAUTION Service Interruption Damage to Equipment Do not try to adjust the ho
173. gation pane Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 26 of 436 Customer service Getting help from a distributor or reseller If you purchased a service contract for your Avaya product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance Getting technical support from the Avaya Web site The easiest and most effective way to get technical support for Avaya products is from the Avaya Technical Support Web site at www avaya com support NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 27 of 436 System information Subject This document is a global document Contact your system supplier or your Avaya representative to verify that the hardware and software described are supported in your area WARNING Before a Large System can be installed a network assessment must be performed and the network must be VolIP ready If the minimum VoIP network requirements are not met the system will not operate properly For information about the minimum VoIP network requirements and converging a data network with VoIP refer to Converging the Data Network with VoIP NN43001 260 This document provides installation and acceptance testing procedures for Meridian 1 Large Systems and Avaya Communication Server 1000M Large Systems Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 28 of 436 System information Communication Server 1000 Release 7 6 sup
174. gn e Hot insertable e Tool less rectifier installation e 100 tool less maintenance strategy e Ultra low total harmonic distortion THD lt 5 e Temperature controlled cooling fans e Mean time before failure MTBF gt 250 000 e Zone 4 seismic e Compliant with global standards FCC part 15 class B UL 1950 CSA 22 2 950 CE VDE IEC 950 and CISPR22 class B Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 102 of 436 Installing DC power System Manager Module The System Manager is the main control element of the Large Candeo system The System Manager s local and remote system management capabilities provide total control over the power system System Manager Module features include e Automatic set up e Single point of adjustment e User friendly interface e Rapid troubleshooting e Real time updates e Extensive data reporting e Inventory mapping e Battery management functions temperature compensation discharge tests charge control equalize load shedding and rectifier sequential start e Alarm and statistical history e Built in remote access using any web browser e System cloning e Integrated system management facilities through several interfaces including RS 232 and RS 485 serial data ports and programmable dry C contacts e Optional modem Distribution 500 Module The Large Candeo s Distribution 500 module provides the DC distribution connectivity for a capacity of 500 A The module plug
175. h on the module power supply and the circuit breaker in the rear of the pedestal to OFF down for any module that will be moved and for the module being added All other modules in the column can safely retain power NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Adding a module to a column Page 355 of 436 3 Remove the module that will be above the module being added a Disconnect the power connectors between the modules review Figure 117 on page 353 b Disconnect the system monitor cable from connector J1 in the module that will be above the module being added c Usea14 3 mm 9 16 in socket wrench to remove the five mounting bolts that secure the module and lift it off the column see Figure 118 on page 355 Figure 118 Module mounting bolt Mounting bolts 3 553 3057 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 356 of 436 Adding a module to a column 4 Position and secure modules a Locate the positioning guides on what is now the top module in the column see Figure 119 on page 356 Make sure the module being added is facing the same direction as the column b Place the module being added on top of the column and adjust it until it is seated securely on the positioning guides Secure the mounting bolts for the module Place the module that was removed on top of the module that was added and secure it with the mounting bolts Figure 119 Module positioning guides
176. he 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules on page 368 2 Connecting the Core Net backplanes on page 369 Connecting the 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules The 3PE cards in the Core Net modules must be directly connected with an NT8D80 cable See Figure 129 on page 369 This connection is only made between the Group 0 shelves in the Core Net modules Procedure 66 Connecting the 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules 1 Connect a NT8D80 cable from the J4 port in the Core Net 0 3PE card to J4 port in the Core Net 1 3PE card 2 Connect a second NT8D80 cable from the J3 port in Core Net 0 to the J3 port in Core Net 1 Note The 3PE cards are located in Core Net slot 11 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling network modules and loops Page 369 of 436 Figure 129 3PE faceplate connection between the Core Net modules NT8D80AZ cable Net ard aling Card ard PS PS ripheral Signaling Card QPC43R Per NT8D04 Superloop Network Card NT8D17 Conterence TDS Card N NT8D04 Superloop Network Card NT8D04 Superloop Network Card NT8D04 Superloop Network Card NTRB53 Clock Controller c QPCA3R Pi NT8D17 Conterence TDS Card N NT8D04 Superloop Network Card NT8D04 Superloop Network Card
177. he Install Menu Communication Server 1000 Software Database BOOTROM RMD Install Tool INSTALL ME N U Please enter The Software Installation Tool will install or upgrade Succession Enterprise System Software Jatabase and the CP BOOTROM You will be prompted throughout the installation and given the opportunity to quit at any time KCR gt gt lt a gt To install Software CP BOOTROM lt b gt To install Software Database CP BOOTROM lt c gt To install Database only lt d gt To install CP BOOTROM only lt t gt To go to the Tools menu lt k gt To install Keycode only For Feature Expansion use OVL143 lt p gt To install 3900 set Languages lt q gt Quit Enter Choice gt lt b gt NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 303 of 436 10 Select option lt b gt To install Software Database CP BOOTROM The system requires the insertion of the RMD containing the software to be installed Communication Server 1000 Software Database BOOTROM RMD Install Tool P lease insert the Removable Media Device into the drive on Core 0 Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt RMD is now in drive Continue with s w checking lt q gt Quit Enter choice gt lt CR gt 11 If the RMD containing the software is already in the drive select
178. he power plug and a ground lug on the rear of the pedestal see Figure 31 Note The resistance should be 0 ohms if it is greater than 0 5 ohms check the power cord connections NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing AC power Page 91 of 436 Figure 31 PDU ground lug locations of s O m O Z 553 8993 Ground lugs 4 Connect the safety ground protective earth wire insulated ground wire must be used for system grounding a Fora single column system connect a 6 AWG wire from the ground source in the service panel to a ground lug on the pedestal b Fora multiple column system connect a 6 AWG wire from the ground source in the service panel to a ground lug on the closest column Daisy chain 6 AWG ground wires from one pedestal to the next as illustrated in Figure 32 connecting all of the columns together You can also run a 6 AWG wire from the ground source to each column individually If the columns are not bolted together physically separated groups of columns should be grounded individually as shown in Figure 30 on page 89 Figure 32 AC column ground lug daisy chain connection From To ground protective Terminate on ground source earth lug of next column last column 553 8992 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 92 of 436 Installing AC power 5 Place a
179. he system is configured in multiple columns see Basic cabling for multiple row network connections on page 384 CAUTION Service Interruption System Failure Due to the possibility of EMI RFI noise do not route cables from front to rear next to the power supply unit Procedure 71 Basic cabling for single row network connections 1 Refer to the work order and the cabling layout shipped with the system to determine e each loop number assigned e the module and slot assignments for the NT8D04 Superloop Network Card associated with each loop e the location of NT8D37 IPE Modules that contain NT8D01 Controller Cards associated with each loop 2 Set the Enb Dis switch on each superloop network card to Dis NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling network modules and loops Page 381 of 436 Cable network loops from the faceplate connector on the superloop network card to the backplane for associated controller cards see Table 63 on page 382 e Label both ends of an NT8D91 cable with the loop number then connect one end of the cable to the superloop network card faceplate connector J1 for Shelf 1 J2 for Shelf 0 e On the backplane for the controller card connect the cable to the SLO SL1 SL2 or SL3 connector assigned to the loop Note The key polarizing tab on the side of the cable connector must be inserted into the keyway on the left side facing the backplane of the backplane connecto
180. hen prompts you to confirm and reboot Enter lt CR gt to quit Enter lt CR gt again to reboot You selected to quit Please confirm Please enter KCR gt gt lt y gt Yes quit lt n gt No DON T quit Enter choice gt lt CR gt You selected to quit the Install Tool You may reboot the system or return to the Main Menu Please enter KCR gt gt lt a gt Reboot the system lt m gt Return to the Main menu Enter Choice gt lt CR gt gt bRemoving temporary file u disk3521 sys gt Removing temporary file u disk3621 sys gt Rebooting system Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 314 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading At this point the system should reload and initialize End of Procedure Testing Core Net 1 and Core Net 0 LD 137 modifications The CMDU MMDU commands are not applicable to CP PIV Instead the following commands are introduced in LD 137 STAT FMD display text Status of both Fixed Media Devices FMD command parameter none STAT FMD 0 1 display text Status of the specified Fixed Media Device command parameter core with values of 0 or 1 STAT RMD display text Status of both Removable Media Devices RMD command parameter none STAT RMD display text Status of the specified Removable Media Device command parameter core with values of 0 or 1 Procedure 49 Testing Core Net 1 1 2 Per
181. hen upgrading software memory upgrades may be required on the Signaling Server the Call Server or both System migration When particular Meridian systems are upgraded to run Communication Server 1000 software and configured to include a Signaling Server they become CS 1000M systems Table 1 lists each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade path to a CS 1000M system Table 1 Meridian 1 systems to Avaya CS 1000M systems This Meridian 1 system Maps to this CS 1000M system Meridian 1 Option 61C CS 1000M Single Group Meridian 1 Option 81C CS 1000M Multi Group For more information see Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrade NTPs NN43021 458 to 474 Intended audience This document is intended for individuals responsible for installing and configuring Large Systems To use this document you should have a basic knowledge of Large System equipment and operation Contact Avaya for information about installation courses You should also read and fully understand the Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Overview NN43021 110 before you install a system Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 30 of 436 System information Conventions Terminology The following systems are referred to generically as Large System e Communication Server 1000M Single Group CS 1000M SG e Communication Server 1000M Multi Group CS 1000M MG e Meridian 1 Option 61C e Meridian 1 Option 8
182. hor hole template kit NT8D64BH provides a mylar template to aid floor marking Only one kit is needed for an installation and this kit is reusable Drilling concrete floors The following tools are required to drill the holes for the anchor bolts dark marking pencil center punch rotary hammer drill carbide tip drill bit 25 4 mm 1 in diameter for Kit A NT8D64BE 24 0 mm 15 16 in diameter for Kit B NT8D64CE blowout bulb or compressed air source hammer or mallet vacuum DANGER Wear safety goggles when drilling anchor holes For all drilling use the appropriate tools and follow local codes Make sure to obey all safety and warning precautions provided by the hammer drill and anchor bolt manufacturers Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 332 of 436 Installing earthquake bracing Procedure 57 Drilling concrete floors IMPORTANT This procedure applies only to installations into concrete floors 1 Using the equipment room floor plan mark the position of all of the columns 2 Center punch each of the hole centers 3 Using a carbide tipped drill bit hammer drill the holes to the size and depth shown in Table 61 on page 332 Table 61 Anchor hole sizes NT8D64BE 25 4 mm 1 in 78 7 mm 3 1 in NT8D64CF 24 mm 15 16 in 125 mm 4 15 16 in Note Special care should be taken in drilling the holes The holes have to be drilled straight and perpendicular to the flo
183. hquake bracing 6 Foramultiple column system install NT8D49AA Spacer Kits between adjacent columns a Attach gaskets to both sides in the front section of each spacer see Figure 112 on page 340 Figure 112 Positioning spacer gaskets Gasket placement re Rear AASRSERESEARERESAREPEEA P Front 553 5641 b Attach a spacer to one side of each module that will be next to another module except on the end column see Figure 112 on page 340 and Figure 113 on page 341 Insert the screws through holes in the trim panels NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing earthquake bracing Page 341 of 436 Figure 113 Adding spacers to columns end column SSS Spacers Spacers Attach spacers to one side of each column except the end column 553 5383 7 Goto Positioning and leveling the system on page 341 End of Procedure Positioning and leveling the system The following tools are required to position and level the system e socket wrench anchor bolts 28mm 1 1 8 in for Kit A 24mm 15 16 in for Kit B e 16mm 5 8 in socket wrench pedestal bolts Procedure 61 Leveling the system 1 Loosen the anchor bolts until the mounting plates are free to move 2 Starting from one end of the line up move a column into position Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 342 of 436 Installing earthquake bracing 3 Loose
184. ial loading 283 a ree jk E E E E E E E EET 283 OVCIVIEN oaran EEEE RAE D EEEE 283 installing the Security Device 2 iccodivercieaoddewarikoodin ss 283 Preparing t power Up AC cio skiew isda esnkeagrereeeekK ee dans 286 Connecting the AC pOWer SONIGE socio iiie tine deccuciases 286 Tomine AL power ON sser cceeeccrenetecercde REGIE EERTE 287 Resetting the main circuit breakers AC power 288 Preparing te power p DC oicucasbcacehekaeweressadan ar eens 290 Tomine DC power OWN 4i3cc0sencac hotbed erkiciakadoad wade 4 290 Wistalline somware s0 4 64 6 Heated es eH eas eee ee eee eee 292 Testing Cor Net 1 and Core Net U rrrcerrccirreerinisinititea 314 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 10 of 436 Contents Performing acceptance tests 5 319 Vt eee ee ee ee eS ee eee ee ee ee ee 319 ACCEDIANCO TERS eerror E09 CEE RRERLERE SURE SES HOSES RRS 319 Testing the mod le power supply co 44 cs4secicavcivarisaannss 320 Testing the blower unit and thermal sensor 321 Testing thesysload oii des chavdiairwivar Aner Ani REA n PANER 323 Testing the system terminal and system monitor 324 ee he POU T EE EET TTE 325 Installing earthquake bracing 327 COUIDE e reast Reese ESE ORLA O Ie os eee eee AEREA 327 Seismic approved applications oncssceecanssveeorecwaseeacens 321 Tastalling seismic Drc oaee carir od bnekeeks peenei SHEED 328 Drilling concrete M
185. in Communication Server Release 7 6 to provide guidance through the major steps of the upgrade and new installation processes The Health Check tool is a PC based GUI application available for download from the Avaya Support portal The upgrade wizard does not change the installation programs of the various system elements It simply guides the user through each process by identifying the required tasks and recommending best practices such as capturing critical pre upgrade information The actual installation upgrade tasks are performed manually under the direction of the appropriate Wizard The Wizard provides the user with an estimated completion time for each task and references to proper documentation and or a best practices checklists For more information on the Upgrade and New Install Wizards see 18 xxxxxxx Upgrades Guide Avaya Communication Server 1000 task flow This section provides a high level task flow for the installation or upgrade of an Avaya CS 1000 system The task flow indicates the recommended sequence of events to follow when configuring a system and provides the document number that contains the detailed procedures required for the task NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Introduction Page 35 of 436 For more information refer to the following documents which are referenced in Figure 1 on page 36 e Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 e Communication Server
186. in circuit breakers for NON CORE columns ON Leave the Core columns OFF NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 289 of 436 For each non Core column verify that e The main circuit breaker in the pedestal did not trip OFF e The main blower unit in each column is running e The ringing generators are lit e The red column LEDs in the top cap are lit These LEDs will remain red until the system reloads Simultaneously turn the main circuit breakers for the two Core columns ON For each Core column verify the following e The main circuit breaker in the pedestal did not trip OFF e The main blower unit in each column is running e The ringing generators are lit e The red column LEDs in the top cap are lit These LEDs will remain red until the system reloads When the system is running reattach all covers and panels to the modules and columns Module covers must be kept on so the air from the pedestal fans will be directed up through all the modules and out the exhaust vents in the top cap When the module covers are removed the upper modules are not cooled properly because the air escapes from the open module door If the module covers are left off and the system overheats circuit cards will malfunction and in extreme cases melt End of Procedure Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 290 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading
187. ing the Signaling Server software from a previous release to CS 1000 Release 7 5 Signaling Server applications in CS 1000 Release 7 5 require Linux You must install NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 417 of 436 CS 1000 Linux Base on your CP PM CP DC or COTS server before you can install any Signaling Server applications CS 1000 Release 7 5 supports the following Signaling Server hardware e CP PM server e CP DC server e IBM X306m server e IBM x3350 server e HP DL320 G4 server e Dell R300 server IMPORTANT Avaya CS 1000 Release 7 5 does not support the ISP1100 Signaling Server You must replace the ISP1100 with a CP PM CP DC or COTS Signaling Server If you are upgrading from a Vxworks Signaling Server Avaya recommends that you backup your IP Phone database and Network Routing Service NRS database on your current software release before upgrading to CS 1000 Linux Base and installing applications You can restore your IP Phone database and NRS backups after you complete the Signaling Server upgrade CS 1000 Release 7 5 requires a Signaling Server to have at least 2 GB of RAM memory and at least 40 GB of hard drive capacity You must upgrade Signaling Servers with less than 2GB of RAM before installing CS 1000 Release 7 5 Linux Base and Signaling Server software For detailed instructions on performing this memory upgrade see Avaya Circuit Card Description and Installation N
188. installation isntructions see Circuit Card Description and Installation NN43001 311 Cabling an IPE Module or Media Gateway Follow Procedure 38 to cable IPE Modules NT8D37 Media Gateways or Media Gateway Expanders Note The corner vertical channels in the rear of the IPE module are outside of the EMI shield Cables in those vertical channels must be shielded and must enter and exit the EMI shielded area through I O panels and adapters DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Tip ring A B E M ESC and ESCG connections may be considered to be Telecommunication Network Voltages TNV Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 248 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Procedure 38 Cabling an IPE Module NT8D37 or Media Gateway 1 Select an appropriate number of NE A25B or equivalent cables long enough to run from the I O panels on the rear of the module or backplanes of the Media Gateway or Expander to the MDF Figure 105 on page 249 shows the I O panels on the NT8D37 IPE Module To both ends of each cable attach a tag that shows the module or chassis number and the I O or backplane connector designation Connect each cable to the appropriate connector on the I O panel or backplane and run the cables to the MDF Terminate each cable on the cross connect block designated with the appropriate module or chassis number Note For information about the MDF layout see Planning and designating a Main Distribution F
189. ion and battery connection panel with 18 plug in positions for load protection devices and eight positions for battery protection devices e supplementary distribution panel with 26 plug in positions for load protection devices Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 110 of 436 Installing DC power Figure 37 Small Candeo 300 A system with supplementary distribution panel Installation reference guide The Candeo system is easy to install For more information about the Candeo SP 48300 Power System AP6C55AA see Candeo Power Systems Installation Manual AP6C75 P0914426 for the Large Candeo system or Installation NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 111 of 436 Manual P7000289 for the Small Candeo system The installation manuals cover the following topics Large Candeo 1 Site Preparation Overview tools and test equipment precautions and receiving materials Locating and Erecting Frames Locating and installing the frame on various floor types and consideration for earthquake anchoring Included also are procedures for isolating the frame for ISG isolated system ground Cabling and Connecting Basic rules connecting AC to rectifiers connecting DC cables from batteries connecting DC loads and miscellaneous cabling This section details all grounding for frame as well as battery return connections Under connecting the DC load cables details on wiring and installing
190. iring configure system monitors and connect PFTUs for DC powered systems using a Candeo DC Power Plant power system Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 98 of 436 Installing DC power Note The procedures in this chapter apply to the global power distribution unit PDU Throughout this document the global PDU is referred to as the NT4N49AA PDU To install reserve power equipment batteries follow the instructions provided with the equipment To comply with safety requirements consult the following before working with any battery systems e Read the Material Safety Data Sheet that must be posted to meet Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA requirements This article outlines appropriate reserve battery handling procedures e Refer to National Electric Code 645 10 This article outlines requirements that call for the installation of AC and DC power kill switches to battery systems in certain environments As a safety precaution all DC service panels should be located in an area that is easily accessible at all times to allow for emergency shutdown An optimal location would be near or just outside the entry to the room containing the DC power system for the Large System Each circuit breaker within a panel should be clearly marked to identify the system component or components it services Candeo DC power systems The Candeo platform provides a simple quick to deploy and easy to operate pow
191. ith a supplementary rectifier shelf The Small Candeo system comes in 1 3 m 51 in and 2 1 m 84 in versions More detailed information is supplied in the following Candeo power system manuals which are included with the system and also available on the Partner Information Center web page Candeo MP481200 Power System User Manual P0914425 Candeo MP481200Power System Installation Guide P0914426 Candeo SP 48300 Power System User Manual P7000154 Candeo SP 48300 Power System Installation Manual P7000289 Candeo SP 48300 Power System Quick Installation Guide for Meridian 1 and Avaya Communication Server 1000 Systems N0029343 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 101 of 436 Large Candeo modules The Candeo platform uses a combination of modules or building blocks to deliver custom configurations The modules include 1 Rectifier 50 48 Module 2 System Manager Module 3 Distribution 500 Module Rectifier 50 48 Module The shelfless Rectifier 50 48 provides up to 50 A 2 750 W of 48 V DC power Designed to operate at a nominal input voltage of 208 240 V AC the rectifier will also operate over an input range of 80 V AC to 300 V AC 45 to 65 Hz at reduced output power The rectifier delivers full output power when operating in environments ranging between 0 C 32 F and 50 C 122 F Rectifier features include e High power density 4 3 W in e High efficiency gt 92 e Shelfless desi
192. l x4 WN J21 DCE cable from COM 2 NT4N88BA for modem 553 9059 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Page 199 of 436 Figure 80 CP PIV Core and Network backplanes NT4N89 cable Network backplane Core backplane a g System Monitor XSM connections HA NT4N29 cable j3sot9 porto jd slot 9 port 0 NT4N29 cable 553 9473 Cabling the I O panel Connect the cables from the CP PIV card faceplate to the I O panel on the back of the Core Net modules Figure 79 on page 198 displays the COM and LAN cable connections e COMI is used to connect a terminal e COM2 is used to connect a modem e LAN 1 ELAN is used to connect the system to a LAN switch e LAN 2 HSP is used to connect Core 0 to Core 1 for system redundancy Note If there is no LAN LAN 1 and LAN 2 are connected from Core 0 to Core 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 200 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system CAUTION Service Interruption Loss of Data Label all cables on both ends before installation Labels help ensure that the cables are properly routed and connected Cable labels also help installers to troubleshoot problems and replace equipment Procedure 24 Installing the CP PIV to I O panel cables 1 Connec
193. l circuit boards has a primary side and a secondary side The primary side which faces the front of the module contains the primary shrouds which provide mechanical guidance for the pins of the card edge connectors The secondary side of the backplane which faces the rear of the module contains Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 192 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system the secondary shrouds which provide mechanical guidance for cable connectors Because the cable troughs and spaces on the sides of a module are within the EMI shielding of the system unshielded cables can be routed in those areas AS space permits Common Equipment cables can be routed horizontally in the cable troughs at the front rear and sides of the module or vertically on the sides of the module Note In a DC powered module because there is no MPDU there is room to route cables horizontally from front to rear on the left side front view of the module CAUTION Service Interruption System Failure Cables must be routed as perpendicular as possible to any nearby power cables Avoid routing cables near power cables if alternate routing is available At the rear of the module cables routed between the I O panel and the rear cover can be parallel to the power cables because the panel provides EMI shielding A label kit is included in system package Use of these labels is optional Note To replace cables from
194. l malfunction and in extreme cases melt End of Procedure Installing software This section contains information about initial software installation procedures Before you begin Dependency Lists DepLists are the Avaya recommended Product Enhancement Packages PEP for a software release As common practice ensure that you have the latest issue of the DepLists at the time of system installation The issue and date of the DepLists is shown on the software CD ROM For more information about the most recent issue of DepLists for this software release see the Enterprise Solution PEP Library If the software CD ROM does not contain the most recent issue of the DepLists download the DepList zip file from the Meridian PEP Library to a PC Card After you run the Software Installation Program see Procedure 48 on page 293 use the Matrix DepList and PEPs MDP commands to install the Dependency Lists from the zip file For more information about accessing and using DepLists see the Product Matrix Dependency List User Guide available on the Enterprise Solution PEP Library NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 293 of 436 Software installation Follow Procedure 48 to install the software First install the software on Core Net 1 and then repeat the process to install the software on Core Net 0 Procedure 48 Installing the software 1 2 3 4 Check that a terminal is conne
195. le behind the I O safety panel CAUTION Service Interruption Damage to Equipment Use the P0741489 Extraction Tool to disconnect cables from the backplane shrouds in NT4N41 Core Network modules Follow the procedure below to avoid bending or breaking pins when removing cable connectors from the backplane shrouds Do not insert the extraction tool unless the cable connector is locked into the shroud Do not force the extraction tool deeper than the detent on the cable connector Do not improvise with common hand tools Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 218 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Procedure 31 Disconnecting cable connectors from the backplane Use extreme caution to avoid bending or breaking backplane pins Do not insert the extraction tool unless the cable connector is locked into the securing clip A gentle tug on the cable will allow you to determine whether or not the connector is secured Do not force the extraction tool deeper than the tab on side of the cable connector hood 1 Grasp the cable connector by the strain relief tab 2 Center the long flat edge at the straight end of the tool between the cable connector hood and the securing clip Note f the straight end of the tool is notched use that end if the connector can be accessed straight on If you must approach the connector from any angle at all use the angled end 3 Gently insert the extraction to
196. les 3 to BATRTN 3 5 Connect an orange 8 AWG 10 mm LRTN wire from the logic return equalizer LRE in the rear of the master power cabinet to LRTN on terminal block TB1 in the pedestal See Figure 47 on page 132 6 Reinstall the metal safety cover over the terminal block a Lower the front panel over the mounting screws on the PDU b Tighten the screws holding the cover 7 Close the covers on the 8B 2R or 8B 4R master power cabinet End of Procedure System monitor connections When connecting to an 8B 2R or 8B 4R master power cabinet one NT8D46AV cable is required to extend the alarm terminal to the master system monitor in the pedestal See Figure 47 on page 132 The orange colored wire on NT8D46AV marked ALARM extends from any of three alarm terminals on the top of the power cabinet to connector marked J4 in the system monitor The remaining Trip and DC ON wires on the NT8D46AV cable are not used and should be snipped before installing the cable NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 135 of 436 Figure 48 UEM to 8B 2R or 8B 4R master power cabinet connections To Test Jack Frame TJF Master Power Cabinet s 16 sq mm green yellow Positive Bus Black wires Factory installed 16 sq mm Orange wire green yellow 10 sq mm Logic Return Equalizer LRE functional earth Alarm terminal 3 off J4 in system monitor XSM
197. ling kit Large System Cabling a DTE DTE null modem cable supplied Note Save the packaging container and packing materials in case you must ship the product Confirmed the area meets all environmental requirements Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 394 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Table 64 Readiness checklist Part 2 of 2 Checked for all power requirements Verified the CP PM meets all required specifications 2GB ram 40GB hard drive NTDW66AAE6 CP PM BIOS version 18 or higher Checked for correct grounding facilities Obtained the following screwdrivers an ECOS 1023 POW R MATE or similar type of multimeter appropriate cable terminating tools a computer maintenance terminal to connect directly to the Signaling Server with teletype terminal ANSI W emulation serial port 9600 bps a Web browser for Element Manager configure cache settings to check for new Web pages every time the browser is invoked and to empty the cache when the browser is closed Prepared the network data as suggested in Converging the Data Network with VoIP NN43001 260 or Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering NN43021 220 as appropriate for your Communication Server 1000 system Read all safety instructions in Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning NN43021 310 as appropriate for your Communication
198. lled yoy z E E A 5 ane Be Bee ae LLL l i LLL eee ae se eee eee 553 9487 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling network modules and loops Page 375 of 436 Figure 134 3PE Fanout panel rear module view SS ha O o O NTND14 to 3PE cables n CA OSS SS J i O O Install SDI Paddle Board o before connecting 3PE cables 553 9529 NTND14 cables to Core Backplane Fanout panel Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 376 of 436 Cabling network modules and loops cCNI slot and port assignments Each system core shelf contains a minimum of one and a maximum of four cCNI cards Each cCNI card contains two ports to support up to two Network groups cCNI cards are identified by slot and port Each port is assigned in software to a specific Network group Use the System Layout Plan to determine the connections for your system e Each 3PE card has two faceplate connections J3 and J4 Two cables are used for each card e 3PEcards in Network shelves 0 are connected to the 3PE Fanout panel in Core Net 0 e 3PE cards in Network shelves 1 are connected to the 3PE Fanout panel in Core Net 1 Table 62 o
199. lumn systems bracing rod installation 339 ground and logic return distribution 87 91 127 system monitor option switches 157 single row systems superloop cabling 380 383 slave switch settings system monitor 158 spacers and spacer kits 44 bracing rod installation 340 341 multiple column systems 76 SPG single point ground 86 split mode monitoring 176 177 static discharge 63 superloop adapter plates 384 superloop cabling 380 switch boxes modem connections 187 189 190 system terminal connections 179 181 sysloads acceptance tests 323 System 600 48 Power Plant PDU connections 129 system installation procedures 37 system monitors acceptance tests 324 cabling 161 configuring 155 for DC power 125 fourth modules 72 module additions 349 352 353 354 355 358 363 364 system monitors cabling 155 161 system terminals 175 acceptance tests 324 connections 176 CPIO port connections 178 179 181 T telephones PFTU connections 153 tests blower units 321 module power supplies 320 PFTU 325 sysload 323 system terminal and system monitor 324 thermal sensors 321 thermal sensors acceptance tests 321 TN terminal number 250 top cap cable egress panels 81 top caps 42 bracing rod installation 335 337 fourth modules 69 grills 81 module additions 359 361 top of columns adding modules to 358 trunks cabling 245 connecting 250 pair termination tables 250
200. ly install the pedestal mounting hardware 1 2 in bolts lock washer plain washer and insulating washer using the plastic insulating washers 4 Re level the column adding or removing shims as needed Go back and re level any other columns 5 Repeat the above steps until all columns have been positioned 6 Slide shims completely under seismic plates First tighten the pedestal mounting bolts torque to 122 J 90 ft lb Then tighten the concrete anchors torque to 48 J 35 ft lb End of Procedure Installing non seismic bracing In certain applications where earthquakes do not occur the pedestal attachment to the floor does not have to meet Bellcore or California OSHPD requirements This application could include attachment to a raised wood or steel floor using the kits described below Installing non seismic bracing involves 1 Selecting the kit on page 342 2 Installing a non seismic anchor kit on page 343 Selecting the kit If the installation does not have to meet the Bellcore or OSHPD requirements the installer can design and install an attachment suitable for the particular installation using e NT8D64BF Floor Mounting Kit e NT8D6401 Insulating Washer Kit NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing earthquake bracing Page 343 of 436 NT8D64BF Floor Mounting Kit The NT8D64BF Floor Mounting Kit provides the hardware required to secure a Large System column to concrete floors for non seismic i
201. m Monitors cabling 161 module additions 349 354 358 NT8D35 Network Module cabling to another network module 367 NT8D37BA IPE Modules 245 249 NT8D37EC IPE Modules 245 249 NT8D37 IPE Modules backplane slots 142 cable connections 246 249 line pair termination tables 250 superloop cabling 380 384 trunk pair termination tables 250 253 NT8D46AD cable 163 NT8D46AJ cable 167 NT8D46AL cable 164 NT8D46AP cable 164 NT8D46AQ cable 167 NT8D46AS cable 163 NT8D46AU cable 167 NT8D46AV cable 168 169 NT8D46BH cable 166 NT8D46BV cable 168 NT8D46 cable 186 187 NT8D46CV cable 168 NT8D46DH cable 166 NT8D46EH cable 166 NT8D49AA Spacer Kits 340 341 NT8D49 Spacer Kits 76 NT8D52 Blower Units 321 NT8D63 Overhead Cable Tray Kits 81 NT8D64BD seismic bracing kits 329 NT8D64BE seismic anchor kits 330 NT8D64CA seismic bracing kits 329 NT8D64CB seismic bracing kits 329 NT8D64CC seismic bracing kits 329 NT8D64CD seismic bracing kits 329 NT8D64CE seismic bracing kits 330 NT8D84 cable 188 NT8D88AD cable 385 NT8D91 cable 381 NT8D92 cable 385 Index Page 433 of 436 NT8D95 cable modem cabling 186 188 system terminal cabling 178 179 181 NT8D98 cable 385 NT9D19 Call Processing Card 176 O option 21A 85 option 61 system terminals 176 option 71 system terminals 176 option switches system monitor 157 Overhead Cable Tray Kits 81 OVL messages 324 P
202. ments for the backplane slots Large System Installation and Commissioning Cabling lines and trunks NT8D37 cable connections Table 32 Page 246 of 436 553 5391 Segment 0 qmoagwuortrYoiazenroad Segment 1 I O panel cable designation Segment 2 NNNMNNN OO N EES ESS a od O l odo io i 4H l Segment 3 o v 5 fa G o 2 2 0 o S a x a mo NT8D37 backplane cable designations Figure 104 MOJ pnolys March 2013 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 247 of 436 Media Gateway cabling requirements Media Gateways require the following e Each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander requires up to four 25 pair cables one 25 pair cable for each slot that is equipped with a trunk or line circuit card one 25 pair cable for each NTAKO3 or NTAKO2 card not using the NTAKI19EC 2 port SDI cable e When Ethernet connections are used instead of traditional cabling use the Media Card Input Output Adapter e For the NTAKO9 1 5 Mbit DTI PRI circuit card use the NTBK04 cable e For the NTAK10 2 0 Mbit DTI circuit card NTAK79 2 0 Mbit PRI circuit card and NTBK50 2 0 Mbit PRI circuit card use the NTBKO5 cable e Certain COT and DDI trunk cards also require a surge suppression cable 700502846 to prevent transient voltages from damaging the equipment For a list of cards requiring the surge suppression cable and for
203. monitors are working LD 37 Load program ENL TTY x Enable the XMS where x system XMS Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 318 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading 10 STAT XSM Check the system monitors KERE Exit program Clear the display and minor alarms on both Cores LD 135 Load program CDSP Clear displays on the cores CMAJ Clear major alarms CMIN ALL Clear minor alarms Test the clocks a Verify that the clock controller is assigned to the active Core LD 60 Load program SSCK x Get status of the clock controllers x is 0 or 1 for Clock 0 or Clock 1 SWCK Switch the Clock if necessary RE Exit program Verify that the Clock Controllers are switching correctly SWCK Switch Clock Wait 30 seconds SWCK Switch Clock again Check applications Check dial tone End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 319 of 436 Performing acceptance tests Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics ABCSPIANCS Ieis ac necks diiri kihe b duis Qabereceredtecussec 319 Testing the module power supply iiccuinice Ha wbscieoieeuenees 320 Testing the blower unit and thermal sensor 321 Tesan hesla ok co eed Sok ee abe ito ea eer J23 Testing the system terminal and system monitor 324 Testing the PFTU seiicrreisrerrettite aera aoni pee RRT EA 325 Acceptance tests CAUTION Ensure that the current
204. n and Commissioning Page 62 of 436 Preparing for installation Figure 16 180 cable connector 553 7498 Equipment handling precautions To avoid personal injury and equipment damage review the following guidelines before handling the equipment Unloading equipment Special ramps packed inside the pallet holding Column 0 must be used to move the equipment off the pallet Follow the instructions provided with the ramps CAUTION Service Interruption Damage to Equipment Never pry up the pedestal to lift the column This could damage to the pedestal Manually slide the column down the ramps provided NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Preparing for installation Page 63 of 436 Working with power supplies There are no user repairable components in the power supply If a power supply fails the complete unit must be replaced Do not disassemble a power supply under any circumstances DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK To avoid the danger of electric shock be careful when working with power equipment and connections Comply with all Warnings External power supplies such as a UPS power plant or batteries may be heavy and require special handling procedures and additional personnel for unloading and installation Also be aware of weight distribution and keep the equipment room floor from being overly stressed Handling circuit cards Follow these precautions when handling circuit cards 1
205. n page 376 specifies the Network group assignments for each cCNI slot and port These designations cannot be changed in software Table 62 cCNI Network group designations Connected cCNI cCNI to Network card slot card port 3PE Fanout panel label group c9 0 N A factory installed directly 0 to the Core Net backplane c9 1 Port 9 1 1 c10 0 Port 10 0 2 c10 1 Port 10 1 3 c11 0 Port 11 0 4 c11 1 Port 11 1 5 c12 0 Port 12 0 6 c12 1 Port 12 1 7 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling network modules and loops Page 377 of 436 cCNI to 3PE Fanout panel cable connections The cCNI slot and port connections are labeled on the Fanout panel see Figure 135 Each 3PE card is connected with two cables one to J3 and one to J4 Table 62 on page 376 specifies the Network group that connects to each slot Figure 135 Fanout panel Core Net module Group 7 Group6 Group5 Group4 Group3 Group2 Group l j3 j3 j j3 j3 j3 slot 12 slot 11 slot 10 slot 10 slot 9 port 0 port 1 port 1 port 0 port 1 j4 j4 slot 10 slot 9 port 0 port 1 j3 slot 9 port 0 j4 slot 9 port 0 Group 0 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 378 of 436 Cabling network modules and loops Connecting the 3PE cables to the 3PE fanout panels Two NTND14 cables connect from J3 and J4 of each 3PE faceplate to the 3PE Fanout panel See Figure 136 on page 378 Connecting network Group 0 Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 involves
206. n the backplane NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 225 of 436 Figure 93 on page 226 displays the COM and LAN cable connections CAUTION Service Interruption Damage to Equipment Label all cables on both ends before installation Labels help ensure that the cables are properly routed and connected Cable labels also help installers to troubleshoot problems and replace equipment Procedure 32 Installing the CP PIV to I O panel cables 1 Connect COM1 on the CP PIV faceplate to J25 on the I O panel with cable NT4N88AA 2 Connect COM2 on the CP PIV faceplate to J21 on the back of the I O panel with cable NT4N88BA 3 Connect the Dual Ethernet Adapter RJ 45 for I O Panel NTRE40AA to J31 Secure the adapter to J31 with the two screws included in the shipment 4 Connect LAN 1 Ethernet on the CP PIV faceplate to J31 top of the I O panel with cable NT4N90BA This connection can only be made after the Dual Ethernet Adapter is installed see step 3 above Note If a LAN switch is not used connect LAN 1 in Core 0 to LAN 1 in Core 1 5 Connect a crossover Ethernet cable NTRC17BA from the LAN 2 port in Core 0 to the LAN 2 port Core 1 This connection is for Core redundancy Note To ensure EMI shielding route the cable along the front of the card cage and through the sides of the Core Net modules 6 Repeat steps 1 through 4 in the second Core Net module
207. ne pair termination tables 251 placement 58 superloop cabling 380 384 trunk pair termination tables 251 253 Index Page 431 of 436 K Krone cross connect system UK 142 L L6 20 receptacles 85 L6 30 receptacles 85 labels Krone cross connect system 144 ladder racks 81 LD 37 program module additions 349 352 354 357 358 366 system terminal tests 324 LED light emitting diodes blower unit acceptance tests 321 power supply acceptance tests 320 sysload acceptance tests 323 leveling earthquake bracing 341 equipment 75 lines cabling 245 connecting 250 pair termination tables 250 terminal numbers 250 line transfer switches 325 locking latches 67 logic return wiring AC power 86 90 DC power 113 LRE logic return equalizers 87 92 M master switch settings system monitor 158 MDF modular distribution frames 137 backplane cable expansion 142 T O panel connections 247 PFTU cross connections 152 PFTU terminations 150 system monitor cabling 165 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 432 of 436 Index Measurement 70 Meridian 1 Option 61C 49 Meridian 1 Option 81C 49 Meridian 1 systems upgrading 57 MFA 150 Modular Power Systems 97 99 modems 175 connections 183 185 187 189 190 modular power systems 97 modules adding between modules 354 adding to columns 347 adding to column top 358 column height recommendations 57 covers 66 in colum
208. nect blocks Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 138 of 436 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame This chapter describes how to install and connect an Avaya Communication Server 1000M system using the BIX or Krone Test Jack Frame UK cross connect terminals Note The examples shown here are BIX and Krone cross connect systems These items are commercially available but are not supplied by Avaya This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 11 Installing the BIX cross connect terminal on page 139 e Procedure 12 Installing the Krone Test Jack Frame UK on page 142 Terminal block requirements The cross connect terminal requires enough connecting blocks to terminate e upto 16 25 pair cables for each IPE shelf e up to four 25 pair cables for each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander e four conductors for the AUX cable from the Media Gateway e one 25 pair cable from each PFTU e wiring from telephones and trunks DANGER Always use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Do not install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never touch uninsulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface Installing the BIX cross connect terminal Procedure 11 describes how to install the BIX cross connect terminal NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame Page 139 of 436
209. nectors are associated with backplane slots 0 through 15 sequentially Table 37 NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D15 E amp M Trunk Card 2 wire type 1 mode pair terminations Part 1 of 2 Pin numbers Pair color W BL BL W W G G W W S S W R O O R R BR BR R BK BL BL BK NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 255 of 436 Table 37 NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D15 E amp M Trunk Card 2 wire type 1 mode pair terminations Part 2 of 2 Pin numbers Pair color 38 13 BK G G BK 40 15 BK S S BK Note Each of the following I O panel connectors is cabled as shown above connectors A B C D E F G H K L M N R S T and U These connectors are associated with backplane slots 0 through 15 sequentially Table 38 NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D15 E amp M Trunk Card 4 wire type 1 and type 2 mode pair terminations Part 1 of 2 Lead designations Type 1 Type 2 Pin numbers Pair color TA TB W BL BL W RA RB W O O W E M W G G W ESC ESCG W BR BR W TA TB W S S W RA RB R BL BL R E M R O O R ESC ESCG R G G R TA TB R BR BR R RA RB R S S R E M BK BL BL BK ESC ESCG BK O O BK Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 256 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 38 NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D15 E amp M Trunk Card 4 wire type 1 and type 2 mode pair terminations Part 2 of 2 Lead designations Type 1 Type 2 Pin numbers Pair color TA TB BK G G BK RA RB BK BR BR BK E M BK S S BK ESC
210. nication between the bv cCNI and 3PE cards for Group 0 is accomplished by using the NT4N29 cable Note Slots c13 and c14 remain empty If necessary install a P0605337 cPCI Card Slot Filler Panel in each slot NT4N48 System Utility Sys Util card The System Utility card is located in slot c15 NT4N39AA Call Processor PIV CP PIV This card is located in the slot marked CP Cabling the Core Net module backplane Before you connect cables to the backplane visually inspect the backplane shroud connectors to make sure there are no bent pins CAUTION Service Interruption Damage to Equipment Pins may be bent or broken if you try to insert the cable connector at an angle Do not push the connector in any further after you hear the click NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 217 of 436 Procedure 30 Cabling the Core Net module backplane 1 Orient the cable connector so the strain relief paddle is to the right 2 Partially insert the cable connector so its guides mate to the corresponding backplane connector 3 Apply a small amount of pressure to push the cable connector straight into the backplane connector You will feel a click when the connector seats End of Procedure Disconnecting cables from the Core Net module backplane To disconnect cables from the Core Net module backplane you must use the P0741489 Extraction Tool provided located in the rear of the modu
211. nk disclaimer Avaya is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked websites referenced within this site or documentation provided by Avaya Avaya is not responsible for the accuracy of any information statement or content provided on these sites and does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them Avaya does not guarantee that these links will work all the time and has no control over the availability of the linked pages Warranty Avaya provides a limited warranty on its hardware and Software Product s Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty In addition Avaya s standard warranty language as well as information regarding support for this Product while under warranty is available to Avaya customers and other parties through the Avaya Support website http support avaya com Please note that if you acquired the Product s from an authorized Avaya reseller outside of the United States and Canada the warranty is provided to you by said Avaya reseller and not by Avaya Software means computer programs in object code provided by Avaya or an Avaya Channel Partner whether as stand alone products or pre installed on hardware products and any upgrades updates bug fixes or modified versions thereto Licenses THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE HTTP SUPPORT AVAYA COM LICENSEINFO ARE A
212. nnect the cable from the modem to an RJ11 telephone jack If a cable is required connect an NT8D46 cable to the modem and to the RJ11 jack At the local end configure the switch box as needed to communicate with the COM2 ports e During normal operation set the switch to the SDI port e For debugging set the switch to the active CPU e For patch downloading set the switch to the inactive CPU End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Connecting a system terminal or modem Page 189 of 436 Figure 74 Modem to a switch box and SDI and COM2 ports dual column systems RJ11 Smart mode jack modem Terminal Modem cable RS 232 or NT8D46 cable Remote end o gt all D gt Kai ngi o gt Kal gt lt I SDI port on Public phone 1 0 panel mg q network pe eae J210n 1 0 panel H 1 O panel Core Net 0 Core Net 1 NT8D95 cables NT8D95 Switch box cable Modem cable or NT8D46 NT8D95 cable Dumb mode modem Note The A0377992 switch box and A0381391 modem can be used in this configuration 553 A0137 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 190 of 436 Connecting a system terminal or modem Figure 75 Modem to a switch box and SDI and COM2 ports single column systems RJ11 Smart mode jack d
213. ns 42 power supplies 320 mounting bolts fourth modules 69 module additions 350 351 355 362 363 multiple column systems ground and logic return distribution 88 multiple column systems bracing rod installation 340 ground and logic return distribution 91 127 spacer kits 44 76 system monitor cabling 164 system monitor option switches 157 multiple row systems superloop cabling 384 N NE A25B cable T O panel connections 248 PFTU connections 152 network loops 367 network modules cabling to another network module 367 placement 58 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 NT4N89AA 197 222 NT6D504 LRE 87 NT6D66 Call Processing Cards sysloads 323 system terminal connections 176 NT7D0902 Rear Mount Conduit Kit 126 NT7DO9CA Pedestals module additions 350 NT7D09 Pedestals 122 NT7D67CB PDU equipment layout 125 power to 129 safety ground 126 NT8D01 Controller Cards cabling 380 384 NT8D04 Superloop Network Cards cabling 380 387 388 loop configurations 382 multiple row connections 384 single row connections 380 NT8D1107 Superloop Adapter Plates 384 NT8D11 CE PE Modules line pair termination tables 250 trunk pair termination tables 250 NT8D13 PE Modules line pair termination tables 250 trunk pair termination tables 250 NT8D14 Universal Trunk Cards pair terminations 253 NT8D15 E amp M Trunk Cards pair terminations 254 NT8D22 System Monitor cabling 161 NT8D22 Syste
214. nstallations that is for a non Bellcore or OSHPD approved installation The kit provides four sets of hardware however a minimum of two anchors must be used diagonally opposite to secure the column pedestal to the floor The kit also provides four insulating washers that can be used during kit installation NT8D6401 Insulating Washer Kit The NT8D6401 Insulating Washer Kit is used for attaching the Large System to the floor when the installer is using a third party anchor kit instead of the Avaya NT8D64BF Floor Mounting Kit In this case one NT8D6401 Insulating Washer Kit is required for each pedestal to electrically insulate the mounting bolts from the pedestal casting Each NT8D6401 Insulating Washer Kit provides four insulating washers Installing a non seismic anchor kit Follow Procedure 62 to install a Floor Mounting Kit NT8D64BF Procedure 62 Installing a Floor Mounting Kit NT8D64BF 1 Mark the position of each Meridian 1 column using the equipment room floor plan 2 Mark the location of all four anchor holes for each column using a dark marking pencil 3 Center punch the center of each hole in the concrete 4 Make the hole in concrete by using a rotary hammer drill to the following size and depth e hole diameter 16 mm 5 8 in e hole depth 50 mm 2 in Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 344 of 436 Installing earthquake bracing 5 Abandon the hole if you should hit a reinforcing bar or the h
215. ocedure 42 Option 1 Using the installed power plug recommended Each column can be directly connected to the AC power source 1 2 Connect the power plug from each column to the AC power respectable Proceed to Turning AC power ON on page 287 End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 287 of 436 Procedure 43 Option 2 Hard wiring the power connections optional Instead of using the power plug each column can be hard wired to the service panel 1 Route one of each green white and black 10 AWG wires through 20 mm 3 4 in conduit from the service panel to each Large System column 2 Atthe column connect the wires to the field wiring access block of the PDU according to the following e GND ground to the green wire e L2 neutral to the white wire e L1 hot to the black wire 3 Connect the wires to the hot neutral and ground connections at the service panel 4 Proceed to Turning AC power ON on page 287 End of Procedure Turning AC power ON Follow Procedure 44 and Procedure 45 to prepare to power up a Large System CAUTION Service Interruption System Failure If a problem occurs when a step is performed resolve that problem before continuing Procedure 44 Turning AC power on 1 Inthe AC power panel set the circuit breaker for Column 0 to ON 2 Set the main circuit breaker for Column 0 to ON rear of the pede
216. ocedure 57 Drilling concrete floors 000 eee cece eee 332 Procedure 58 installing KITA seisestesenderien sas enied dns iaeus 333 Procedure 59 installing KIB cscscdcaetisasseiaesnieenaeanuws 335 Procedure 60 Installing earthquake rods 000e seen eens 336 Procedure 61 Leveling the system 2000 cece eee e eee 341 Procedure 62 Installing a Floor Mounting Kit NT8D64BF 343 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 22 of 436 List of Procedures Procedure 63 Adding a module to the base of acolumn 349 Procedure 64 Adding a module between two other modules 354 Procedure 65 Adding a module to the top of the column 358 Procedure 66 Connecting the 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules 368 Procedure 67 Connecting the Core Net backplanes 369 Procedure 68 Connecting Groups 1 through 7 Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 371 Procedure 69 Connecting the Network Shelf 0 3PE cards to Core Net 0 379 Procedure 70 Connecting the Network Shelf 1 3PE cards to Core Net 1 379 Procedure 71 Basic cabling for single row network connections 380 Procedure 72 Basic cabling for multiple row network connections 384 Procedure 73 Installing ELAN and TLAN Ethernet ports on the back of a Communication Server 1000M UEM 396 Procedure 74 Connecting a Server Card to the ELAN and TLAN subnets of a Communication Server 1000M system
217. odule on a column Contents Overview This chapter contains information about the following topics Bs a se a eS eae Ses 69 Placing the fourth module on a colum 2 4 0 0 0evse0iseerdeae 69 A four module column is shipped in two segments One shipping pallet carries the pedestal and three modules Another shipping pallet carries the fourth module and top cap Starting at the bottom of the column modules are numbered from zero to three in each column Placing the fourth module on a column Use Procedure 2 to place the fourth module and top cap on the column To add a module to a column that is already powered see the procedures in Adding a module to a column on page 347 CAUTION Service Interruption System Failure Never add a Common Equipment module in the third or the fourth tier of a column Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 70 of 436 Placing the fourth module on a column WARNING A fully loaded module weighs approximately 60 kg 130 Ib More than one person is required to place a module on a column Procedure 2 Placing the fourth module on a column 1 Position and secure the fourth module Locate the positioning guides on the third module see Figure 20 b Position the fourth module so it faces the same direction as the column c Remove the front and rear module covers on the fourth module and rear module cover on the third module d Place the fourth module on top of
218. of 436 Note 1 In some equipment sites depending on the grounding topology and the size of the building the floor ground bar FGB and the building principal ground BPG may be the same busbar Note 2 In some equipment sites depending on the grounding topology the power plant BRR ground bar may be determined as being the SPG Then the BRR lead is usually run to the FGB Cabling and connecting the ground leads involves 1 Connecting the power plant frame ground or safety ground leads on page 115 2 Installing safety ground protective earth wiring on page 127 Connecting the power plant frame ground or safety ground leads Unless specifically instructed otherwise in the specifications or by the Customer the frame ground leads also referred to as the safety ground leads are usually connected using the approach described in Procedure 7 and as shown in Figure 38 on page 118 and Figure 39 on page 119 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 116 of 436 Installing DC power Note 1 The frame ground collector cable is normally sized according to its length distance between the main DC distribution cabinet and the FGB or BPG as well as the maximum fuse or circuit breaker size that can be provided in the power plant See Table 3 for the recommended cable size for the Candeo power system Note 2 The frame ground drop into the Candeo frame must be the same size as the frame ground collector The frame ground
219. ol and gradually apply pressure in the direction directly toward the backplane while gently pulling the cable away from the backplane A gentle side to side rocking motion may be used on the cable if needed CAUTION Service Interruption Damage to Equipment Do not pry the against the connector with the extraction tool Simply inserting the tool between the connector and the securing clip is sufficient to unlock the connector Prying may cause damage to the connector or the backplane pins 4 Stop applying pressure as soon as the cable connector comes loose from the backplane 5 Slowly remove the extraction tool and the cable connector End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 219 of 436 Optioning the System Utility Card To install the system utility card first identify Core Net 0 and Core Net 1 shelves Then adjust the DIP switches according to Table 27 below Table 27 System Utility Card DIP switch settings Core Net 0 Core Net 1 DIP switch 1 on off DIP switch 2 on on Figure 89 on page 220 shows Core card front side placement If the Core cards are not installed refer to this figure to add or replace cards Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 220 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Figure 89 Core card placement in the NT4N41 Core Net Module front
220. ole breaks through A minimum of two diagonally opposite anchors are required for this application 6 Remove any debris from the hole with a blowout bulb or compressed air Use a vacuum cleaner to dispose of the debris 7 Insert the anchors into the holes Use the manufacturer s setting tool to install each anchor flush with the surface of the concrete Use the Hilti HST 12 7 mm 1 2 in setting tool manufacturer part 000329805 or equivalent 8 Position each column over the anchors Insert bolt metal washer and shoulder washer into the pedestal hole as shown in the Figure 114 on page 345 On the far side of the pedestal flange thread a plastic washer a metal washer and the nut onto the bolt Insert the bolt into the concrete anchor 10 Tighten the nut to the pedestal flange and torque it to 34 J 25 ft lb using a 20 mm 3 4 in socket wrench Do not overtighten 11 Repeat steps 8 to 11 for remaining bolts End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing earthquake bracing Page 345 of 436 Figure 114 Pedestal mounting flange rear view Pedestal Bolt Metal Washer ________ nsulating ore Washer x Anchor 553 7473 Shoulder Nut Washer Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 346 of 436 Installing earthquake bracing NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 347 of 436 Adding a module to a column Contents Overview This chapter
221. ommissioning Page 234 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Figure 97 Single slot FIJI card faceplate ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY ENB DIS SWITCH amp LED ACT LOS LEDs CONNECTOR CLOCK CABLE CONNECTOR CLOCK TWIN FIJI CABLE CONNECTOR DIN TYPE MONITOR PORT H NTRBDBX RLS XX NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Page 235 of 436 Optical Cable Management Card OCMC Because fiber optic cables are easily damaged if bent the NTRE39 Optical Cable Management Card OCMC is installed in Network modules to store and protect excess cable length The OCMC card ensures that the fiber cable is not bent beyond aa 30 mm 1 1 5 in bend radius Figure 98 on page 235 The OCMC contains no electronic components and is not powered by the backplane This card is used primarily in upgrades where the intergroup cable distances vary greatly OCMC is a single width card installed between the Power supply and slot 1 of a Network module Figure 98 OCMC the Optical Cable Management Card 65 3 ES Be Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 236 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Installing the Shelf 0 fiber optic ring ascending To create the Shelf 0 fiber optic loop connect the FIJI cards in each Network Shelf 0 in ascending order Figure 99 on page 237 Procedure 34 Installing the Shelf
222. on Err Group 1 shelf 1 loops 48 to 63 Group 2 shelf 1 loops 80 to 95 Group 3 shelf 1 loops 112 to 127 Group 4 shelf 1 loops 144 to 159 Group 5 shelf 1 loops 176 to 191 Group 6 shelf 1 Group 7 shelf 1 loops 208 to 223 loops 240 to 255 Group 1 shelf 0 loops 32 to 47 Group 2 shelf 0 loops 64 to 79 Group 3 shelf 0 loops 96to 111 Group 4 shelf 0 loops 128 to 143 Group 5 shelf 0 loops 160 to 175 Group 6 shelf 0 Group 7 shelf 0 loops 192 to 207 loops 224 to 239 CoraNot 0 Group 0 shelf 0 loops 0 15 Peripheral Signaling NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK Pat Extender Ful 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 10 11 12 13 14 333537 39 41 43 45 47 1 0 Common Equipment Network Group Shelf Card cage NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 Inside each UEM is a metal card cage This card cage holds the circuit cards power card and related equipment for that module UEMs are named for the function of that card cage Card cages are bolted inside the UEM case Card cages can be removed and replaced for repairs or upgrades March 2013 Preparing for installation Page 47 of 436 Core Net module Large Systems feature the NT4N41 Core Net module The Core Ne
223. onnections are made Connect the safety ground protective earth wire e Fora single column system connect a 6 AWG wire from the ground source in the service panel to a ground lug on the pedestal Fora multiple column system connect a 6 AWG wire from the ground source in the service panel to a ground lug on the closest column Daisy chain 6 AWG ground wires from one pedestal to the Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 128 of 436 Installing DC power next as illustrated in Figure 46 connecting all of the columns together or run a 6 AWG wire from the ground source to each column individually Note 1 Use only insulated ground wire for system grounding Note 2 The safety ground protective earth wire must be routed within the cable tie saddles and under the cable restraint bar at the base of the pedestal 5 Place a warning tag on the connection at the ground source The warning tag should read WARNING TELEPHONE SYSTEM GROUND CONNECTION DO NOT DISCONNECT Figure 46 DC column ground lug daisy chain connection ji 7 o Qo o o o o aa am Ep ES ey ap ES w a 5 a o 1 From To ground protective ground source earth lug or service panel Terminate on last column 553 8995 End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 129 of 436 Connecting po
224. option lt a gt RMD is now in drive Continue with s w checking or simply press lt CR gt to continue If the RMD is not yet in the drive insert it and then press lt CR gt Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 304 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading 12 The system displays the release of the software found on RMD under the swload directory and requests confirmation to continue the installation Communication Server 1000 Software Database BOOTROM RMD Install Tool The RMD contains System S W version xxxx Please enter lt CR gt gt lt y gt Yes this is the correct version Continue lt n gt No this is not the correct version Try another RMD or a different keycode Enter choice gt lt CR gt Note f the RMD contains the correct software release select option lt y gt Yes this is the correct version Continue or simply press lt CR gt to continue If the software release is not correct and you want to replace the RMD insert the correct RMD in the drive and then press lt CR gt If you want to replace the keycode select option lt n gt No this is not the correct version NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 305 of 436 13 Choose yes for the Dependency Lists installation Do you want to install Dependency Lists Please enter KCR gt gt lt y gt Yes Do the De
225. or 1 for Clock 0 or Clock 1 SWCK Switch the Clock if necessary SERS Exit program 8 Verify that the Clock Controllers are switching correctly SWCK Switch Clock Wait 30 seconds SWCK Switch Clock again 9 Check applications 10 Check dial tone End of Procedure Switch call processing Procedure 50 Switching call processing LD 135 Load program SCPU Switch call processing from Core Net to Core Net 0 Core Net 0 is now the active call processor End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 317 of 436 Procedure 51 Testing Core Net 0 From Core Net 0 perform these tests 1 Perform a redundancy sanity test LD 135 Load program STAT CPU Get status of CPU and memory TEST CPU Test CPU Check the LCD states a Perform a visual check of the LCDs b Test LCDs LD 135 Load program TEST LCDs Test LCDs DSPL ALL Test the System Utility cards and the cCNI cards LD 135 Load program STATSUTL Get the status of the System Utility card TEST SUTL Test the System Utility card STAT CNIcs_ Get status of cCNI cards core slot TEST CNI cs Test cCNI core slot Test system redundancy LD 137 Load program TEST RDUN Test redundancy DATA RDUN Test database integrity STAT FMD Status of one or both Fixed Media Devices FMD STAT RMD Status of one or both Removable Media Devices RMD Install the two system monitors Test that the system
226. or surface in order for the anchors to be installed correctly The drill fixture kit can aid this process 4 Should you hit reinforcing bar or the hole breaks through abandon that hole and use the secondary hole location indicated in the anchor hole template 5 Remove any debris from the holes with a blowout bulb or compressed air Use a vacuum to dispose of the debris 6 Ifthe mounting plates are not to be installed immediately cover the anchor holes to prevent debris from falling into them End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing earthquake bracing Page 333 of 436 Installing Kit A and Kit B anchor plates The following tools are required to install the anchors and the anchor plates Kit A setting tool Hilti HST 3 4 in manufacturer part 329821 28mm 1 1 8 in open end wrench Kit B 24 5 mm 1 in open end wrench Procedure 58 Installing Kit A 1 Insert the anchors into the holes Use the manufacturer s setting tool to install each anchor flush with the surface of the concrete The setting tool is required for the Hilti anchor Locate the two mounting plates for each column over the anchors Place an adapter bushing into each of the plate holes and insert a 19 mm 3 4 in diameter bolt and flat washer as shown in Figure 108 on page 334 Level the plates with shims Leave the stack of shims exposed until all leveling has been completed this will allow the addition or r
227. ormation about Clock controller DIP switch settings see Circuit Card Reference NN43001 311 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Page 203 of 436 Procedure 25 Connecting the Clock Controller cables See Figure 85 on page 209 1 Connect P1 of the NT8D75 cable to port J3 of Clock Controller 0 2 Connect P2 of the NT8D75 cable to port J3 of Clock Controller 1 End of Procedure Network Group 0 Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 Each Single Group System contains one Network group Group 0 Each Network group is comprised of two Network shelves Shelf 0 and Shelf 1 The Core Net modules contain Network Group 0 Shelf 0 is in Core Net 0 Shelf 1 is in Core Net 1 Shelf 0 must be connected to Shelf 1 for Network Group 0 to operate correctly This section contains instructions on 1 Connecting the 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules on page 203 2 Inspecting CNI to 3PE factory installed cables on page 204 3 Connecting the Core Net backplanes on page 206 Connecting the 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules The 3PE cards in the Core Net modules must be directly connected with an NT8D80 cable See Figure 82 on page 205 This connection is only made between the Group 0 shelves in the Core Net modules Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 204 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Procedure 26 Connecting the 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules
228. ource at the input into an isolated filtered and regulated DC power output up to 30 A used to feed the loads and to charge a positive grounded battery These rectifiers are of the plug in type to facilitate their installation maintenance replacement and repair Each rectifier is equipped with a cooling fan that is field replaceable Designed to operate at a nominal input voltage of 110 120 or 208 240 V AC the rectifier will also operate over an input range of 75 V AC to 310 V AC 45 to 65 Hz at reduced output power The rectifier delivers full output power when operating in environments ranging between 40 C 40 F and 55 C 131 F The rectifier requires no adjustments Under normal operation operating parameters of the rectifiers in a system such as float voltage and boost voltage are entirely configured and controlled by the System Manager SP Power shelves The Candeo SP48300 can have either one or two power shelves The initial power shelf provides five rectifier positions and one system manager position while the supplementary power shelf has six rectifier positions and an optional AC interface box for front access applications Each rectifier position provides interconnection points for the AC input the DC output and the control and alarm data bus CAN protocol The total output capacity of the system is 300 A The output capacity of the initial shelf is 150 A five rectifiers delivering 30 A each The output Larg
229. out installing or upgrading CS 1000 Linux Base see Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 Installing Linux applications Avaya CS 1000 Release 7 5 Signaling Server and SIP line software are Linux applications Linux applications install on CS 1000 Linux Base and interact with the CS 1000 Linux Base application framework You can deploy and install Linux applications with the CS 1000 Linux Base Centralized Deployment Manager You can configure and deploy SIP Line with Element Manager EM For information about Linux applications and Centralized Deployment Manager see Avaya Signaling Server IP Line Applications Fundamentals NN3001 125 and Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 For information about Element Manager see Avaya Element Manager System Administration NN43001 632 Joining the UCM security domain The UCM Primary Security Server acts as the RADIUS server that CS 1000 devices use to obtain authentication and access control parameters for CLI access The UCM Primary Security Server sends RADIUS related parameters to CS 1000 devices using the SSH protocol Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 428 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server When a device joins the UCM security domain a mutually trusted SSH channel is created You must manually confirm the fingerprint of the public key before the UCM Primary Security S
230. owered systems use Procedure 5 on page 90 to install safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring and to install ground and alarm cabling for a UPS For AC powered systems without reserve power one input receptacle is required per column within 2 4 m 8 ft of each pedestal One IG L6 30 or L6 30 receptacle is required for each column Instead of using the power plug provided the Power Distribution Unit PDU can be hard wired to the power source In this case 10 AWG conductors routed through 20 mm 3 4 in conduit are generally used The leads connect to the L1 L2 and GND terminations on the field wiring terminal block on the PDU Note Do not use ground fault circuit interrupt GFCI devices on Large System AC power feeds Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 86 of 436 Installing AC power Systems that use reserve power plug into the UPS which in turn plugs into the power source associated batteries can be located within the UPS or installed externally Consult the UPS documentation for receptacle requirements As a safety precaution all AC service panels should be located in an area that is easily accessible at all times to allow for emergency shutdown An optimal location would be near or just outside the entry to the room containing the Large System or the UPS if equipped Each circuit breaker in the panels should be clearly marked to identify the system component or components it services S
231. p to 10 rectifiers 500 A capacity Example configuration 2 1 05 m 42 in Frame with battery kit LVD and distribution 500 with 20 breaker positions 17 mid trip breakers 30 A one GMTX fuse block takes up 3 breaker positions Additional distribution 500 with 20 breaker positions 11 mid trip breakers 30 A three GMTX fuse blocks takes up 3 breaker positions per block System monitor Up to 6 rectifiers 300 A capacity Example configuration 3 2 1 m 84 in Frame with battery kit LVD and distribution 500 with 20 breaker positions 20 mid trip breakers 30 A Second 2 1 m 84 in Frame with battery kit LVD and distribution 500 with 20 breaker positions 11 mid trip breakers 30 A three GMTX fuse blocks takes up 3 breaker positions per block Additional distribution 500 with 20 breaker positions 10 mid trip breakers 30 A System monitor Up to 10 rectifiers 500 A capacity in frame one up to 10 rectifiers 500 A capacity in frame two One interframe DC link bar kit NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 105 of 436 Small Candeo modules The Candeo platform uses a combination of modules or building blocks to deliver custom configurations The modules include e Rectifier 30 48 e Power shelves e System Manager SP e Distribution 300 panel Rectifier 30 48 The Rectifier 48 V DC 1500 W is a switch mode rectifier that converts the single phase AC s
232. password is required Contact Astec support for a temporary password to change this field After the setting has been changed use the normally open contacts when wiring J8 Note For further information about all alarms that can be configured for the Candeo see the Alarms section in the Candeo Power Systems User Guide P0914425 and Candeo SP 48300 Power System AP6C55AA User Manual P7000154 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 174 of 436 Configuring the system monitor NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 175 of 436 Connecting a system terminal or modem Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Abo t The system terminal os en dag edbeneonwesceneu seas eras 175 Connecting g ermina lt 5 ach ce eee aeree eaa 177 Connecting a terminal to a COM port 00 0 0008 178 Connecting a switch box and terminal to COM1 and COM2 ports 179 Connecting a switch box and terminal to SDI and COM1 ports 181 Connecting a Modem e csvscsecu eA rR ERATE VENEER ETES 182 COnDCUTINE a MOd M 5 casi eee S ee eae ew ERNE ERE ROAD iiai 184 Connecting a modem ta an SDI pott cscisccsaescerasieaeevees 185 Connecting a modem to switch box COM2 ports SDI ports 187 About the system terminal At this point in the installation a terminal must be connected to a serial data interface SDI port to provide an I O interface to the system When the installation is complete a terminal
233. pendency Lists installation lt n gt No Continue without Dependency Lists installation Enter choice gt n Are you sure Please enter KCR gt gt lt n gt No Go to the Dependency List menu lt y gt Yes Go to the next menu Enter choice gt y Enable Automatic Centralized Software Upgrade CSU Feature Default YES Please enter KCR gt gt lt y gt Yes lt n gt No Enter choice gt n gt Processing the install control file gt Installing release xxxx Note Avaya CS 1000 Release 7 5 software installations that do not require DepLists do not prompt for a DepLists installation Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 306 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading 14 The Installation Status Summary appears INSTALLATION STATUS SUMMARY SSSSsSSSSSSS SSSSSSSH 4 SSS SSSH4fSSSSSSSHSS S Option Choice Status Comment SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSH SSSSSSSH4 SSSSHSHH4fSSSSS HS SW RMD to FMD yes install for rel XXXXX SSS SSS SSS SSSS4fSSSS SSS SfSS SSS SSSt SSSSSSSSSSSS gt Option Choice Status Comment SS SS SS SS SESS SSSSSfSS SSS SSStSSSSSSSq4SSSSSSSS gt Dependency Lists no SSSSS SSS SSSSSSSSSfSSSSSSS St SS SSSSSq SSSSSSSS Option Choice Status Comment SSSSsSSSSSSSSSSSH4 SSSSSSSH4SSSS SSH SSSSS SS AUTO CSU Feature no AUTO CSU Disabled Option Choice Status Comment SSSS SS SSS SESS SSSSf
234. ports only the Call Processor Pentium IV CP PIV in the CS 1000M SG Meridian 1 Option 61C CS 1000M MG and Meridian 1 Option 81C For older system installations see the CS 1000 Release 7 0 version of this document available on the web at www avaya com support To access the document from the Technical Support page go to the content listing page for Avaya Communication Server 1000M 1 Select the Browse product support tab on the main page 2 Select Product Families from the drop down menu and then Enterprise Communication Servers in the first window 3 Select Communication Server 1000M Cabinet Chassis from the second window 4 Select Documentation from the third window and click the Go button on the right 5 Use the filter provided under the Documentation tab to search for Communication Server 1000M Note on legacy products and releases This document contains information about systems components and features that are compatible with Avaya Communication Server 1000 software For more information about legacy products and releases click the Documentation link under Support on the Avaya home page www avaya com Applicable systems This document applies to the following systems e Communication Server 1000M Single Group CS 1000M SG e Communication Server 1000M Multi Group CS 1000M MG NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 System information Page 29 of 436 e Meridian 1 Option 61C e Meridian 1 Option 81C Note W
235. r Blue and white wires should show through the top of the cable connector and if there is a directional label the arrow on the cable connector should be located at the top right Figure 137 on page 383 shows the superloop network card faceplate connectors the backplane connectors for the controller card and the cables required Seat and secure all connectors Set the Enb Dis switch on each network card to Enb During system software configuration use the Software Input Output Administration NN43001 611 to enter loop assignments End of Procedure Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 382 of 436 Table 63 NT8D04 network loop configurations One segment per superloop Superloop network card NT8D04 1 Cabling network modules and loops Faceplate connector Controller card NT8DO1AC 1 Backplane connector NT8D04 2 NT8DO1AC 1 NT8D04 3 NT8DO1AC 1 NT8D04 4 NT8DO1AC 1 Two segments per superloop NT8D04 1 NT8DO1AD 1 NT8D04 2 NT8DO1AD 1 Four segments per superloop NT8D04 1 NT8DO1AD 1 Eight segments per superloop NT8D04 1 NT8DO1AD 1 NT8D04 1 NT8D01AD 2 One segment per superloop three segments per another superloop NT8D04 1 NT8DO1AD 1 NT8D04 2 NT8DO1AD 1 Four segments per superloop four segments per another superloop Note NT8D04 1 NT8DO1AC 1 NT8D04 2 NT8D01AC 2
236. rame on page 137 Make sure all cables are neatly run properly seated and secured with cable ties NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 249 of 436 Figure 105 NT8D37 IPE Module I O panels Left Right 553 5928 End of Procedure Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 250 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Connecting lines and trunks Follow Procedure 39 to connect lines and trunks Ensure that wiring is not reversed and is on the proper terminals Allow enough slack in the wiring to allow tracing and to reconnect wires if they break at the terminal Procedure 39 Connecting lines and trunks 1 Extend incoming wiring such as cables from the central office or wiring from a recorded announcement machine to the MDF and terminate them on separate connecting blocks 2 Assign and record terminal numbers TN for each line or trunk Determine the location of the line or trunk connection and its assigned TN from the work order or assignment records 3 Connect each line and trunk to the TN using cross connecting wire typically 24 AWG type Z wire Table 33 on page 251 lists pair termination tables for line and trunk cards in NT8D37 IPE Modules 4 Cross connect incoming wiring and lines and trunks at the MDF End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines and trunks Page 251 of 436
237. rd Note For CP PM version 2 cards press the F key to enter the boot menu select Faceplate RMD and press Enter to boot from the faceplate CF card NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 423 of 436 Figure 162 CP PM faceplate drive boot System CPU Low Memory 632KB coprocessor Extended Memory 101105 Ide D Type Serial Ports 1 2 0378 o2Fe8 Ide 1 Type 3 ROB Shadoving Enabled Ide 2 Type BIOS Version NIDOTSAA 14 Attempting to boot from faceplate drive CPU Frequency 1400 Mike V1 CBR FREER EERE EEE tHE tHE ttt tte ttt tte tte ttt ttt tte tte ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt tte tte os ee Se a a eS ee ee ee ee ee ee oe tttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt FALE ERE FEE EEE FHT EH tH tt tH tt tt ttt tte tt ttt ttt tte tte ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt FEEL AEE THE FEE THE SHE THEE SHEA ES HEE FEE THE FEE THEE SHE AHL THE FHEE SHE FHL SHE FEE EEE HEE tHE tttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt FAFA ERE FREE ETH THE HE e tt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt tte ttt He He HE HE HE HE HEHE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HHH HH HE 5 The welcome screen appears Press ENTER to direct the input and output to COM1 6 Figure 163 appears if the CP PM card has a BIOS version lower than 18 Enter yes to proceed with the automatic upgrade CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not interrupt the BIOS upgrade process Large Sy
238. rd faceplate in Network Group 2 Shelf 0 to the Port 10 0 J3 connection on the 3PE Fanout panel in Core Net 0 Connect a NTND14 cable of the appropriate length from J4 on the 3PE card faceplate in Network Group 2 Shelf 0 to the Port 10 0 J4 connection on the 3PE Fanout panel in Core Net 0 Install the remaining cables according to the assignments in Table 62 on page 376 End of Procedure Procedure 70 Connecting the Network Shelf 1 3PE cards to Core Net 1 1 Connect a NTND14 cable of the appropriate length from J3 on the 3PE card faceplate in Network Group 1 Shelf 1 to the Port 9 1 J3 connection on the 3PE Fanout panel in Core Net 1 Connect a NTND14 cable of the appropriate length from J4 on the 3PE card faceplate in Network Group 1 Shelf 1 to the Port 9 1 J4 connection on the 3PE Fanout panel in Core Net 1 Connect a NTND14 cable of the appropriate length from J3 on the 3PE card faceplate in Network Group 2 Shelf 1 to the Port 10 0 J3 connection on the 3PE Fanout panel in Core Net 1 Connect a NTND14 cable of the appropriate length from J4 on the 3PE card faceplate in Network Group 2 Shelf 1 to the Port 10 0 J4 connection on the 3PE Fanout panel in Core Net 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 380 of 436 Cabling network modules and loops 5 Install the remaining cables according to the assignments in Table 62 on page 376 End of Procedure Cabling a Superloop Network Card single column If t
239. re 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 _LRTN UNIT ASSY a gt j j O PPN OG E Y BLO CBO CB1 8 a 2 Cable tie saddle Cable restraint bar Cable tie saddle 553 8989 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 127 of 436 Installing the Four Feed PDU Installing the NT4N49AA PDU is a two step process It involves 1 2 Installing safety ground protective earth wiring on page 127 Connecting power from the power plant to the PDU on page 129 Note For installation in the UK see procedure Connecting UK power to the Four Feed PDU on page 133 Installing safety ground protective earth wiring CAUTION Service Interruption System Failure Failure to follow grounding procedures can result in unsafe or faulty equipment For more information about approved grounding sources and methods see Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning and Engineering NN43021 220 Procedure 8 Installing safety ground protective earth wiring 1 Remove the associated 30 A fuse or set circuit breakers to the OFF position in the power plant to disconnect each pedestal from the power source Remove the air intake grill from the rear of the pedestal At the rear of the pedestal use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the metal cover over the terminal block to access the safety ground protective earth lugs Leave the cover off until all pedestal c
240. ress the Power switch End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 415 of 436 Connecting a Dell COTS server In geographic regions that are susceptible to electrical storms Avaya recommends that you plug the Dell server into an AC surge suppressor Figure 158 shows the rear view of the Dell R300 server Figure 158 Dell R300 server rear view Serial port USB Port Gigabit Ethernet Ports Power Supply Optional redundant pwr shown Note When you perform Procedure 77 Connecting a Dell COTS server on page 415 see Figure 158 Procedure 77 Connecting a Dell COTS server 1 Connect the Dell server to the TLAN subnet Insert the RJ 45 CAT5 or better cable into the TLAN Ethernet port on the back of the server Insert the other end of the cable into the TLAN subnet of the Layer 2 switch 2 Connect the Dell server to the ELAN subnet Insert the RJ 45 CAT5 or better cable into the ELAN Ethernet port on the back of the server Insert the other end of the cable into the ELAN subnet of the Layer 2 switch 3 Connect a DTE DTE null modem serial cable from the Serial Port on the back of the server to a maintenance terminal 4 Connect the Dell server power cord Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 416 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server a Check that the power cord is the type required in the region where you use the server Do not modify or use the supplied A
241. rge System Installation and Commissioning Page 148 of 436 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame Figure 59 Label for Exchange Line Trunk Card NT5K18 EXCHANGE LINES 1 2 TRI TRI TRI T RI OOP cai EXCHANGE LINES SHELF EXCHANGE NO S 4 5 6 T T RI TRI TRI T RI EXCHANGE LINES SHELF EXCHANGE NO S 0 1 2 3 TRI TRI TRI T RI l 553 6466 Figure 60 Label for Direct Dial Inward Trunk Card NT5K17 LOOR sans DIRECT DIAL INWARDS SHEH sens 0 1 2 3 IRI TRI TRI T R l DIRECT DIAL INWARDS SHELE S EXCHANGE LINES 4 5 6 7 TRI TRI T RI T RI l DIRECT DIAL INWARDS EXCHANGE LINES 0 1 2 3 TRI TRI TRI T RI l 553 6467 March 2013 Page 149 of 436 Installing Power Failure Transfer Units Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics PPI CO puranionSs oss 25505100240 REA 149 Meline a FETU vegrett eee leh ee eae ede eet 132 Connecting trunks and telephones 60 000se0eeseeausees 153 Installing QUAG PPI Ss cccceedtoc pace atten od Eoi Ee oes 154 PFTU configurations In AC powered systems Power Fail Transfer Units PFTU are powered by the A0367916 Auxiliary 48 V Power Supply up to six PFTUs can be supported by one power supply In DC powered systems PFTUs are
242. rill see Figure 26 Figure 26 Removing top cap grills Topcap Air exhaust grill AN austor rear Note If routing cables through the top replace the rear exhaust grill with the optional Top Cap Cable Egress Panel P0699851 which has cutouts for the 553 AAA1514 cables 2 Mounta support bracket at the front and rear of the module see Figure 27 on page 83 Using two bolts secure each support to the threaded holes in the top of the module NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing overhead cable tray kits Page 83 of 436 Figure 27 Overhead cable tray kit Customer provided Sx ladder rack Bracket 553 3074 3 Install the front and rear air exhaust grills that come with the kit 4 Place the cable rack on top of the support brackets and fasten it to the supports with the J bolts as shown in Figure 27 End of Procedure Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 84 of 436 Installing overhead cable tray kits NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 85 of 436 Installing AC power Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics AC powered SYMONS oboe over edad cdsen SSN aG EOE MOSS KOM 85 Safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring 86 Installing safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring 90 Installine UPS ground cabling 2 occ csc2iceederaciesesiecancns 93 AC powered systems For AC p
243. ring for installation Page 67 of 436 a With a flat blade screwdriver turn the lock clockwise on the two locking latches see Figure 18 on page 67 Figure 18 Locking latches on the module cover Slide to unlatch cover Turn lock screw up to lock 553 A0132 b Simultaneously push the latches toward the center of the cover and pull the cover toward you while lifting it away from the module c Set the covers aside until the installation is complete 3 Remove the front and rear grills from each pedestal Loosen the two captive screws that secure the grill b Pull the grill forward and lift it out of the base of the pedestal see Figure 19 on page 68 c Set the grills aside until the installation is complete Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 68 of 436 Preparing for installation Figure 19 Removing the pedestal grill Captive screw Captive screw 553 3054 4 Make sure all of the items on the system order form are on the packing slip that comes with the equipment 5 Inspect all equipment for physical damage Report any damage to your supplier 6 Check the option settings on all cards that have a switch symbol on the faceplate For more information about option switch and jumper settings see Circuit Card Reference NN43001 31 1 End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 69 of 436 Placing the fourth m
244. rizontal position of a column by tightening the spacer screws Tightening the screws with the columns too far apart will warp the spacer g One ata time push columns together level align and attach the other side of the spacers Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 78 of 436 Positioning and leveling equipment Figure 24 Spacer positioning Rear NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 Spacer cs Screw Spacer Stand off 553 A0130 March 2013 Positioning and leveling equipment Page 79 of 436 Figure 25 Column positioning with spacers Step 1 Attach spacers to one side of each column except the end column end column E Spacers Spacers Step 2 One at a time push columns together level align and attach the other side of the spacer Step3 Positioning completed 553 5067 End of Procedure Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 80 of 436 Positioning and leveling equipment NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 81 of 436 Installing overhead cable tray kits Contents This chapter contains information about the following topic Installing overhead cable tray kits 0 000 000 008 81 Installing overhead cable tr
245. rk module backplane are five connectors A B C D and E See Figure 131 on page 372 The connectors from Shelf 0 of each Network Group 1 through 7 must be connected to the connectors in Shelf 1 of the same Network group Note In North American systems these connections are made in the factory In shipments outside North America the Network shelves are shipped separately These connections must be made in the field NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling network modules and loops Page 371 of 436 This connection is NOT made for Network Group 0 in the Core Net modules Procedure 68 Connecting Groups 1 through 7 Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 1 O a A WO N Connect an NT8D99AB cable from the A connector in Shelf 0 of Network Group 1 to the A connector in Shelf 1 Network Group 1 Connect the B connector in Shelf 0 to the B connector in Shelf 1 Connect the C connector in Shelf 0 to the C connector in Shelf 1 Connect the D connector in Shelf 0 to the D connector in Shelf 1 Connect the E connector in Shelf 0 to the E connector in Shelf 1 Connect the A B C D and E connectors between Shelf 0 and Shelf 1 for all other Network groups in the system except Group 0 Note All connections are made with an NT8D99AB cable Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 372 of 436 Cabling network modules and loops Figure 131 Network Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 backplane connections Groups 1 through 7 Network backplane
246. rloop Network Card associated with each loop e The location of NT8D37 IPE Modules that contain NT8D01 Controller Cards associated with each loop 2 Set the Enb Dis switch on the faceplate of each network card to Dis 3 Install NT8D1107 Superloop Adapter Plates on universal I O panels P0715058 if required The superloop adapter plate reduces a QPC414 network loop cutout to the size for a superloop connection The recommended order for installing superloop adapter plates is over I O panel locations J2 J6 J10 J22 J26 J31 e Position the adapter plate over the QPC414 cutout and install the screw and washer at the bottom of the plate e Position the cable connector on the adapter plate and install one screw and washer at the top and one screw and washer at the bottom of the connector Figure 138 on page 386 shows mounting details for the superloop adapter plate NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 6 7 Cabling network modules and loops Page 385 of 436 Cable network loops from the faceplate connector on the network card to the I O panels on the rear of the Core Net or Network Module Label both ends of an NT8D88AD cable with the loop number then connect one end of the cable to the network card faceplate connector J1 for Shelf 1 J2 for Shelf 0 Route the cable around the card cage to the I O panel and mount the cable connector in one of the cutouts in the panel The recommended order for connections is J1
247. rt ELAN port on the back of the Communication Server 1000M UEM You installed this ELAN port at the back of the UEM when you installed the Signaling Server in the UEM For more information see Procedure 73 Installing ELAN and TLAN Ethernet ports on the back of a Communication Server 1000M UEM on page 396 2 Insert the other end of the RJ 45 CAT5 Ethernet cable into an Ethernet port on the ELAN Ethernet switch 3 Insert the end of another RJ 45 CAT5 Ethernet cable not supplied into the TLAN network interface port TLAN port on the back of the Communication Server 1000M UEM You installed this TLAN port at the back of the UEM when you installed the Signaling Server in the UEM For more information see Procedure 73 Installing ELAN and TLAN Ethernet ports on the back of a Communication Server 1000M UEM on page 396 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 410 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server 4 Insert the other end of the RJ 45 CAT5 Ethernet cable into an Ethernet port on the TLAN Ethernet switch End of Procedure Verify or change the baud rate To verify or change the baud rate on an Avaya CP PM Signaling Server see Avaya Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 411 of 436 Connecting an IBM COTS server In geographic regions that are susceptible to electrical storms Avaya recommends that
248. s COM ports or COM1 and COM2 are pre configured on I O addresses four and five The COMI and COM2 ports are active only when the CPU associated with the CP card is active Therefore the COM1 and COM2 ports should not be used as the only I O connection for the system When the initial installation is complete you must leave a terminal or a modem connected to the system One SDI port in a network slot must be permanently connected to a terminal or modem On the COM1 and COM2 ports you can 1 disconnect the ports 2 leave terminals connected for local monitoring and 3 connect modems for remote monitoring The ABCDE Switch which provides up to four to one switching is available from Avaya as part number A0377992 The switch box can be used to connect the SDI and COM1 and COM2 ports to a terminal or a modem If used one switch box must be used for terminals and one for modems Commercial terminal servers can also be used to concentrate the serial ports on the equipment in a telecom room Terminal guidelines During an installation you can connect terminals to the COM1 ports for split mode monitoring or programming or both Due to the speed of the system messages displayed personal computers are useful for file capture and review Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 178 of 436 Connecting a system terminal or modem Terminals connected to the COM ports can be installed as follows 1 One terminal connect
249. s are associated with backplane slots 0 through 15 sequentially NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 253 of 436 Table 35 NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card pair terminations Lead designations RAN Paging Other Pin mode mode modes numbers Pair color Unit OT OR W BL BL W A PG W O O W 1T 1R W G G W A PG W BR BR W 2T 2R W S S W A PG R BL BL R 3T 3R R O O R A PG R G G R 4T 4R R BR BR R A PG R S S R 5T 5R BK BL BL BK A PG BK O O BK 6T 6R BK G G BK A PG BK BR BK BR 7T 7R BK S S BK A PG Y BL BL Y Note 1 Each of the following I O panel connectors is cabled as shown above connectors A B C D E F G H K L M N R S T and U These connectors are associated with backplane slots 0 through 15 sequentially Note 2 Use LD 14 to select trunk termination impedance 600 ohm or 900 ohm For more information about LD 15 see the Software Input Output Administration NN43001 61 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 254 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 36 NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D15 E amp M Trunk Card 2 wire paging mode pair terminations Pin numbers Pair color 26 1 W BL BL W 29 4 W BR BR W W S S W R G G R R BR BR R BK O O BK BK G G BK Y BL BL Y Note Each of the following I O panel connectors is cabled as shown above connectors A B C D E F G H K L M N R S T and U These con
250. s in the system anywhere when greater distribution capacity is required The module can accommodate a wide variety of distribution elements including single and double pole circuit breakers as well as GMTX type fuses NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 103 of 436 Distribution Module features include e Wide selection of distribution elements up to twenty 1 to 100 A single pole circuit breakers or up to ten 100 to 150 A double pole circuit breakers or up to six 50 A capacity blocks each providing 10 positions for 0 to 10 A GMTX fuses up to 20 fuse holders or any mix of the above elements e Completely modular e No pre set limits to the number of distribution modules e Tool less additions or upgrades e Hot insertable e Front access e Fully insulated environment e No configuration required e Troubleshooter alarm indicators e System capacity monitoring Additional information is available in the following Candeo Power System manuals e Candeo Power System User guide P0914425 e Candeo Power System Installation Guide P0914426 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 104 of 436 Installing DC power Large Candeo sample configurations Example configuration 1 1 05 m 42 in Frame with battery kit LVD and distribution 500 with 20 breaker positions 17 mid trip breakers 30 A one GMTX fuse block takes up 3 breaker positions System monitor U
251. s of daisy chained flat ribbon cables between each module is used to connect the power supplies and the top cap thermal sensors to the system monitor located in the pedestal The flat cable routes through the square holes in the rear horizontal cable trough Figure 64 shows the cabling of the system monitor in a column Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 162 of 436 Configuring the system monitor Figure 64 System monitor module to module cabling NT8D46AC Module NT8D46AA Pedestal gt NT8D46AB 553 7544 Follow the steps in Procedure 16 to cable the NT8D22 System Monitor Procedure 16 Cabling the System Monitor NT8D22 1 Remove the I O safety panel in the rear of the module with CPU 0 2 Connect the master system monitor to the SDI port NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Configuring the system monitor Page 163 of 436 3 Connect the master system monitor to slave unit 1 with an NT8D46AS cable 4 Connect the narrow ribbon on an NT8D46AG cable from connector J2 in the module with CPU 0 to the assigned port on the SDI card see Figure 65 Figure 65 Cabling two side by side NTD40 shelves system monitor to slave unit 1 and SDI port To next module NT8D46AA Backplane To system monitor power supply assembly power supply assembly To system monitor in the pedestal in the pedestal 553 3112 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page
252. s to a COM port in one CPU the cable is switched from module to module as needed one terminal is required in addition to the terminal for the SDI port connection see Figure 70 on page 179 One terminal connects to a switch box that connects to a COM1 port in each CPU one terminal and a switch box are required in addition to the terminal for the SDI port connection see Figure 71 on page 180 One terminal connects to a switch box that connects to an SDI port and to a COM port in each CPU one terminal and a switch box are required see Figure 72 on page 182 Connecting a terminal to a COM port Use Procedure 18 to connect a COM 1 port directly no switch box to a terminal see Figure 70 on page 179 Procedure 18 Connecting a terminal to a COM port 1 Set the terminal to 9600 baud 7 data space parity one stop bit full duplex XON Connect an NT8D95 cable to a matching connector on the terminal Connect the NT8D95 cable to J25 on the I O panel in the rear of the cPCI Core Network Module If you are using only one terminal for both COM1 ports switch the cable as needed The terminal connected to the SDI port always communicates with the active CPU End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Figure 70 Connecting a system terminal or modem Page 179 of 436 One terminal for the COM1 ports Terminal NT8D95 cable Network Module SDI port on I O panel
253. same extension kcg NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 301 of 436 Select the keycode to be used on the system The system validates the selected keycode and displays the software release and machine type authorized Validating keycode Copying cf2 keycode KCport60430m kcd to u keycode Copy OK 1114 bytes copied The provided keycode authorizes the install of Kxxx software all subissues for machine type XXXX CPP4 processor on Xxxx Note The software release displayed depends on the keycode file content The machine type displayed can be one of the following according to the keycode content e 3521 CP PIV processor on CS 1000M SG for Meridian 1 Option 61C CP PIV e 3621 CP PIV processor on CS 1000M MG for CS 1000E and Meridian 1 Option 81C CP PIV systems The system requests keycode validation Communication Server 1000 Software Database BOOTROM RMD Install Tool Please confirm that this keycode matches the System S W on the RMD Please enter lt CR gt gt lt y gt Yes the keycode matches Go on to Install Menu lt n gt No the keycode does not match Try another keycode Enter choice gt Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 302 of 436 9 Powering up the system and initial loading If the keycode matches enter lt CR gt to continue the installation The system displays t
254. seismic bracing 00 0 eee eee eee eee 342 installing a non seismmc anchor Kit ss s acies Gaicadiiee vil ee keds 343 Seismic approved applications Depending on the geographic location the floor installation method may or may not require seismic bracing To meet seismic bracing requirements the installation must meet the Bellcore or the California OSHPD installation specifications In locations that do not have earthquakes a non seismic installation is acceptable In certain seismic approved applications where the pedestal attachment to the floor may be required but Avaya does not offer the appropriate hardware the installation organization must contact a seismic engineering firm to install the pedestal that meets Bellcore or California OSHPD requirements This application could include attachment to a raised wood or steel floor Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 328 of 436 Installing earthquake bracing Universal equipment modules UEM are designed to withstand most earthquakes However to provide earthquake security two kits must be installed for each column a bracing kit provides vertical support to each column of modules and an anchor kit secures each pedestal to the floor Installing seismic bracing Each Avaya Communication Server 1000M Large System and Meridian 1 Large System has been certified to meet two of the most stringent seismic specifications for concrete floor mounting BELLCORE and CALIFO
255. shelf 1 Network backplane shelf 0 NT8D99AB cable 553 9584 End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling network modules and loops Page 373 of 436 Connecting the Network modules to the Core Net modules Each Network shelf contains one 3PE card These 3PE cards are connected to the Fanout panel in the back of the Core Net shelves Figure 132 on page 373 Figure 133 on page 374 and Figure 134 on page 375 show the location of the Fanout panel and 3PE cables on the Core Net backplane Figure 132 3PE Fanout panel in the Core Net module top view Terminatiop Panel NT8D76 cables to Network module factory installed PS cCNI Slot c9 cCNI Slot c10 cCNI_ Slotc11 cCNI_ Slotc12 Sys Util CP PIV Conference TDS Superloop Network card Superloop Network card Superloop Network card Peripheral Signaling card 3 Port Extender card Network card IGS FlJI card NET NET NET 553 9488 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 374 of 436 Figure 133 Core Net backplane rear view Cabling network modules and loops 3PE termination panel y Core backplane 3PE connection to cCNI transition card Slot 9 0 factory insta
256. stal Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 288 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading 3 Set the blower unit switch for Column 0 to ON On initial power up the blower rotates slowly As the system heats up the cooling fans will turn faster Set the main circuit breaker for Column 0 to ON The main circuit breaker is located in the rear of the pedestal Set the power supply switch or MPDU circuit breaker in each module to ON The green light will turn on after a few seconds Note f the module is equipped with a ringing generator set the breakers or switches for both the power supply and the ringing generator to ON The green LED on a ringing generator normally takes up to 90 seconds to light Repeat step 1 through step 5 for each column in the system Start with Column 1 and continue until power is turned on in all the columns Make sure the green lights in all the module power supplies are lit before proceeding to the next column When the green LED lights in all module power supplies and ringing generators are lit proceed to Resetting the main circuit breakers AC power on page 288 End of Procedure Resetting the main circuit breakers AC power Follow Procedure 45 to reset the main circuit breakers AC power Procedure 45 Resetting the main circuit breakers AC power 1 2 3 Turn the main circuit breakers in the pedestal of each column OFF again Wait 30 seconds Set the ma
257. stem Installation and Commissioning Page 264 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 43 NT5K18 Flexible Central Office Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors A E K R Part 2 of 2 Lead designations I O panel connectors COT Pins K T3 32 Slot 12 R3 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 Slot 12 11 37 12 38 Slot 12 13 39 14 40 Slot 12 15 41 16 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 265 of 436 Table 44 NT5K18 Flexible Central Office Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors B F L S Part 1 of 2 Lead designations I O panel connectors COT Pins TO 26 W BL Slot 1 Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 13 Unit 0 RO 1 BL W 27 W O 2 O W T1 28 W G Slot 1 Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 13 Unit 1 R1 3 G W 29 W BR 4 BR W T2 30 W S Slot 1 Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 13 Unit 2 R2 5 S W 31 R BL 6 BL R T3 32 R O Slot 1 Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 13 Unit 3 R3 7 O R 33 R G 8 G R T4 34 R BR Slot 1 Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 13 Unit 4 R4 9 BR R 35 R S 10 S R T5 36 BK BL Slot 1 Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 13 Unit 5 R5 11 BL BK 37 BK O 12 O BK T6 38 BK G Slot 1 Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 13 Unit 6 R6 13 G BK 39 BK BR 14 BR BK Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 266 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 44 NT5K18 Flexible Central Office Trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors B F L S Part 2 of 2 Lead designations I O panel connectors
258. stem Installation and Commissioning Page 284 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading Procedure 40 Installing the Security Device The Security Device fits into the System Utility card Figure 106 on page 285 1 Insert the Security Device into the Security Device holder on the System Utility card with the Avaya side facing up Do not bend the clip more than necessary 2 Check that the Security Device is securely in place End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Powering up the system and initial loading Page 285 of 436 Figure 106 Security Device Security Device Security ID Side view Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 286 of 436 Powering up the system and initial loading Preparing to power up AC Follow Procedure 41 to prepare to power up a Large System CAUTION Verify that the safety grounds are properly connected Procedure 41 Preparing to power up AC 1 O a fF WO DN Set the AC service panel circuit breakers OFF Set the main circuit breakers in the rear of each pedestal OFF Set the power supply or MPDU switches in each module OFF Set the ringing generators in each IPE or PE module OFF Set the blower unit switch in the front of each pedestal OFF Set all faceplate switches to ENB End of Procedure Connecting the AC power source To connect a Large System to the AC power source follow one of the two options below Pr
259. stem Installation and Commissioning Page 424 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Figure 163 CP PM BIOS automatic upgrade AEARALAEAE EAE ALAEAE ATA APNEA AP PARE AE EAE AA AAPA AE OP na ETETE ET a CP PM BIOS version is less than 18 BIOS upgrade is required To complete the upgrade BIOS settings must be changed to defaults gt refer to the documentation for more information y ee ee re F T 7 NEN ii T RENNEN F F REN Fatt Do you want to upgrade BIOS ROM up to the version 18 yes no yes BIOS ROM upgrade Please wait BIOS ROM upgrade is finished Machine will be rebooted right now 7 Verify that the BIOS upgrade is finished Press Enter to reboot 8 During the reboot memory check press Ctrl c to access the CP PM BIOS setup menu Note f you miss the timing to press Ctrl c you must reboot the system and try again The Linux Platform Base installation software will display a warning if you do not reset the CP PM BIOS to factory defaults 9 Figure 164 appears Select Reset CMOS to factory defaults from the menu NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 425 of 436 Figure 164 CP PM BIOS setup System BIOS Setup Utility v5 y p 2005 General Software Tne 11 rights Basic CWS Configuration Features Contiguralion Custom Configuration PnP Corriguration syetenm BIOS Lebuccrer 3 to last kron values to factory defaulte to CHOS anc fxic witho
260. stem to CS 1000E the slot next to slot 7 is occupied by the External Peripheral Equipment Controller XPEC This prevents the CP PM or CP DC double wide faceplate from seating into slot 7 The next task that you must perform is to install ELAN and TLAN Ethernet ports on the back of the Communication Server 1000M UEM These ports are used to connect your Server to the ELAN and TLAN Ethernet subnets of your Communication Server 1000M system Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 396 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Use the following procedure to install ELAN and TLAN Ethernet ports on the back of a Communication Server 1000M UEM IMPORTANT Installing ELAN and TLAN Ethernet ports on the back of a Communication Server 1000M Universal Equipment Module UEM disrupts service You must turn off power to the shelf during this procedure Procedure 73 Installing ELAN and TLAN Ethernet ports on the back of a Communication Server 1000M UEM 1 Obtain the special cabling kit NTDW69AAE5 The NTDW69AAE5 cabling kit includes the items shown in Figure 142 Figure 142 NTDW69AAE5 Cabling Kit contents NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 397 of 436 The following is a list of items in the NTDW69AAE5 cabling kit e two RJ 45 CAT5 Ethernet patch cables e two Ethernet port couplers e one Ethernet port adapter plate e two screws e two nuts e two washers e two ferri
261. t 2 on the Network module NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Required cables Table 31 Required cables Cable type Fiber Ring cable Clock to Flul Clock to Clock FIJI to FIJI Syne Quantity 1 per FIJI card 2 per system 1 per system 1 per network group Order Code NTRC48AB NTRC48BB NTRC48CB NTRC48DA NTRC48EA NTRC48FA NTRC46AB NTRC46BB NTRC46CB NTRC49AA NTRC49BA NTRC47AA Indicates the lengths of the two Y terminations Page 231 of 436 Table 31 on page 231 outlines the required cables Cable lengths will vary depending on system configuration Description 1 8 m 6 ft fiber optic cable 3 m 10 ft fiber optic cable 3 6 m 12 ft fiber optic cable 4 25 m 14 ft fiber optic cable 5 8 m 19 ft fiber optic cable 7 9 m 26 ft fiber optic cable 1 2 m to 4 1 m 4 ft to 13 5 ft 1 65 m to 2 4 m 5 5 ft to 8 ft 6 7 m 22 ft 1 8 m 6 ft 6 m 20 ft 1 5m 5 ft Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 232 of 436 Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system WARNING The shortest Fiber Cable must always be used The cables from Group 0 to Group 1 must always be the same length as the cables from the last group back to Group 0 The delta between the lengths of each fiber ring from Group 0 to any other group must not exceed 15 m 50 ft Rings are directional Ring 0 is ascending and Ring 1 is descending
262. t COM1 on the CP PIV faceplate to J25 on the I O panel with cable NT4N88AA Connect COM2 on the CP PIV faceplate to J21 on the back of the I O panel with cable NT4N88BA Connect the Dual Ethernet Adapter RJ 45 for I O Panel NTRE40AA to J31 Secure the adapter to J31 with the two screws included in the shipment Connect LAN 1 Ethernet on the CP PIV faceplate to J31 top of the I O panel with cable NT4N90BA This connection can only be made after the Dual Ethernet Adapter is installed see step 3 above Note f a LAN switch is not used connect LAN 1 in Core 0 to LAN 1 in Core 1 Connect a crossover Ethernet cable NTRC17BA from the LAN 2 port in Core 0 to the LAN 2 port Core 1 This connection is for Core redundancy Note To ensure EMI shielding route the cable along the front of the card cage and through the sides of the Core Net modules Repeat steps 1 through 4 in the second Core Net module End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Page 201 of 436 Cabling the Network side Table 22 lists the number of circuit cards required by each system Table 23 lists the number of net cables required by each system Table 22 Required Net side cards Quantity 2 per system 2 per system 2 per system Table 23 Required Net side cables Quantity 1 per system 2 per system Order Code NTRB53 Description Clock Controller card 3PE QPC44
263. t SDI and COM2 ports to a switch box and a modem see Figure 74 on page 189 and Figure 75 on page 190 Procedure 23 Connecting a modem to a switch box COM2 and SDI ports 1 Atthe remote end connect an RS 232 cable to the terminal and to the modem 2 Atthe remote end connect the cable from the modem to an RJ11 telephone jack If a cable is required connect an NT8D46 cable to the modem and to the RJ11 jack Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 188 of 436 Connecting a system terminal or modem 3 At the local end configure the modem Follow the manufacturer s instructions to set the modem for 9600 baud autoanswer dumb mode command recognition OFF and command echo OFF At the local end connect NT8D95 cables to e J21 on the I O panel in the rear of the Core or Core Network Modules e the SDI port on the I O panel in the rear of the Network module At the local end connect NT8D84 cables to the SDI Paddle Board at the Core Network backplane to the I O panel in the rear of the cPCI Core Network Module At the local end connect NT8D95 cables from the I O panels to a matching connector on the switch box a If you are using an A0377992 ABCDE box connect cables as follows Connect CPU 0 to connector A Connect CPU 1 to connector B Connect the SDI port to connector D connector C is common At the local end connect an NT8D95 cable from the switch box to the modem At the local end co
264. t module provides a unified hardware platform for single group and multi group configurations The Core Net module supports e An integrated cPCI shelf e ANT4N48 System Utility card that incorporates the functionality of the System Utility Transition card LCD display and the security device holder e A fanout panel see Figure 5 on page 48 to provide connectivity to the network shelf e Upgrades from single group to multi group configurations requiring a new keycode file and any additional hardware necessary for a multi group system Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 48 of 436 Preparing for installation Figure 5 NT4N41 Core Net shelf fanout panel backplane Group 2 Group1 j3 slot 9 port 1 j3 slot 9 port 0 j4 slot 9 port 0 Group 0 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Preparing for installation Page 49 of 436 System options The procedures in this document apply to the following system options e Meridian 1 Option 61C dual CPU full network group e Meridian 1 Option 81C dual CPU multiple network groups e CS 1000M SG a Meridian 1 Option 61C system upgraded to include a Signaling Server e CS 1000M MG a Meridian 1 Option 81C system upgraded to include a Signaling Server For information about Signaling Server installation and configuration see Linux Platform Base and Applications Installation and Commissioning NN43001 315 All system options are available in both AC an
265. t on the back panel of the UEM a Insert the end of one of the RU 45 CAT5 Ethernet patch cables supplied into the ELAN network interface ELAN port on the Server faceplate b Route the Ethernet patch cable through the hole you made in the back panel of the UEM c Plug the other end of the Ethernet patch cable into one of the Ethernet port couplers mounted in the Ethernet port adapter plate d Label the Ethernet port coupler as ELAN See Figure 149 and Figure 150 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 402 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Figure 149 ELAN connection on CP PM faceplate NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 403 of 436 Figure 150 ELAN connection on Ethernet port coupler 9 Connect the server to the TLAN subnet a Insert one end of the remaining RJ 45 CAT5 Ethernet patch cable supplied into the TLAN network interface TLAN port on the Server faceplate b Route the Ethernet patch cable through the hole you made in the back panel of the UEM c Plug the other end of the Ethernet patch cable into the remaining Ethernet port coupler mounted in the Ethernet port adapter plate d Label the Ethernet port coupler as TLAN See Figure 151 and Figure 152 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 404 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Figure 151 TLAN connection on CP PM faceplate NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March
266. tage Nortel Software provided hereunder solely to the extent of the authorized activation or authorized usage level solely for the purpose specified in the Documentation and solely as embedded in for execution on or in the event the applicable Documentation permits installation on non Avaya equipment for communication with Avaya equipment Charges for Heritage Nortel Software may be based on extent of activation or use authorized as specified in an order or invoice Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise no use should be made of materials on this site the Documentation Software or hardware provided by Avaya All content on this site the documentation and the Product provided by Avaya including the selection arrangement and design of the content is owned either by Avaya or its licensors and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws including the sui generis rights relating to the protection of databases You may not modify copy reproduce republish upload post transmit or distribute in any way any content in whole or in part including any code and software unless expressly authorized by Avaya Unauthorized reproduction transmission dissemination storage and or use without the express written consent of Avaya can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third party components Third Party Components mean certain software programs or portions thereof inclu
267. tandard 06 01 March 2013 Slot 15 Cabling lines and trunks Page 275 of 436 Table 52 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M 2 Wire Recorded Announcement trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors A E K R Pair I O panel connectors Slot 12 Slot 15 Slot 12 Slot 12 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 276 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 53 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M 2 Wire Recorded Announcement trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors B F L S I O panel connectors F L Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 13 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Slot 10 Slot 14 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 277 of 436 Table 54 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M 2 Wire Recorded Announcement trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors C G M T I O panel connectors G M Slot 10 Slot 14 Slot 11 Slot 15 Slot 11 Slot 15 Slot 11 Slot 15 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 278 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 55 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M 4 Wire Type 1 connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors A E K R Lead designations I O panel connectors Type 1 mode Pins K Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 12 Note The cable pair designated TA TB is the transmit pair The pair designated RA RB is the receive pair NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Ca
268. te beads 2 Insert an Ethernet port coupler into the adapter plate See Figure 143 Figure 143 One Ethernet port coupler in adapter plate 3 Insert the other Ethernet port coupler into the adapter plate See Figure 144 on page 398 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 398 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Figure 144 Two Ethernet port couplers in adapter plate 4 Loosely attach screws washers and nuts to the Ethernet port adapter plate See Figure 145 Figure 145 One Ethernet port coupler in adapter plate NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 399 of 436 5 Switch off the UEM power supplies See Figure 146 Figure 146 Shut down UEM power supplies i z ee im Pa TICN 6 Select one of the J2 J5 knock out plates on the back of the UEM See Figure 147 Note For DC powered systems turn off the breakers in the pedestal not on the shelf Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 400 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Figure 147 J2 J5 plates on back panel of UEM 7 Knock out the metal plate from the selected J2 J5 location to provide a hole through which the Ethernet patch cables are routed and to which the Ethernet port adapter plate is attached See Figure 148 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 401 of 436 Figure 148 Selected J2 J5 plate on back panel of UEM 8 Establish an ELAN por
269. the batteries Startup and adjustment procedures Installation of the rectifiers in the power shelves and initial startup testing and adjustment of the power system Candeo SP 48300 power systems make use of a microprocessor based controller which controls the settings for the rectifiers There are no hardware based adjustments for the System Manager SP but there are other configuration steps required Refer to chapter Configuring and operating the system in the user manual P7000154 End of job routines and turnover End of job routines include designating frame numbers rectifiers and distribution circuits and touching up damaged and or scratched painted surfaces then turning over the system to the customer Configuration reference guide The Candeo system is easy to configure For more information see Candeo Power System User manual UC6C75 P0914425 for the Large Candeo system or Candeo SP 48300 Power System AP6C55AA User Manual P7000154 for the Small Candeo system The installation manuals cover the following topics Large Candeo NA wu A WB N e Overview of the Candeo Power System System Description and Specifications System Engineering Configuring and Operating the Candeo Power System Maintenance Troubleshooting Replacement Parts NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 113 of 436 8 Abbreviations and Acronyms 9 Technical Service Assistance Small Candeo 1 Introduc
270. the column and adjust it until it is seated securely on the positioning guides e Remove the I O safety panel in the fourth module to gain access for installing the center mounting bolt f Use a 14mm 9 16 in socket wrench to secure the fourth module with five mounting bolts see Figure 21 on page 72 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Placing the fourth module on a column Page 71 of 436 Figure 20 Module positioning guides Positioning guides Opening for cables 553 3056 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 72 of 436 Placing the fourth module on a column Figure 21 Module mounting bolts ae Mounting bolts 553 3057 2 Connect the module to module power and system monitor cables a Connect the power connectors between the modules see Figure 22 on page 73 b Connect the system monitor cable from connector J2 on the third module to J1 on the fourth module NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Placing the fourth module on a column Page 73 of 436 Figure 22 Power and system monitor connections Top cap I O safety panel Module 3 Power connectors between modules System monitor connector J2 in Module 2 to J1 in Module 3 I O safety panel Module 2 Modules 0 and 1 below Rear of the column 553 5068 3 Reinstall the I O safety panel in each mo
271. the fourth module on a column 70 Procedure 3 Positioning and leveling the equipment 75 Procedure 4 Installing the overhead cable tray kits 82 Procedure 5 Installing safety ground protective earth and logic return WING nassocic os beds e biases se eee eteeseceadees 90 Procedure 6 Installing the UPS ground cabling 94 Procedure 7 Installing and connecting the power plant frame ground a E E er ee 117 Procedure 8 Installing safety ground protective earth wiring 127 Procedure 9 Connecting power from the power plant to the PDU NTANAORA J ccccscecnceaateeece cecse dein E 129 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 18 of 436 List of Procedures Procedure 10 Connecting UK power to the Four Feed PDU 133 Procedure 11 Installing the BIX cross connect terminal 139 Procedure 12 Installing the Krone Test Jack Frame UK 142 Procedure 13 Installing a PFTU oc cc cease sd eesensetensewee 152 Procedure 14 Connecting trunks and telephones 153 Procedure 15 Configuring the System Monitor NT8D22 157 Procedure 16 Cabling the System Monitor NT8D22 162 Procedure 17 Configuring the alarm ports 000eeeeeee 173 Procedure 18 Connecting a terminal toa COM port 178 Procedure 19 Connecting a switch box and terminal to COM1 and COM2 DONS io hi RG hile RS R
272. the load clips fuse blocks and breakers are detailed Miscellaneous cables details remote sensing to batteries input ports and alarm connections communication port connections to connect to RS 232 Ethernet or external modem Startup and Adjustment Procedures The Candeo system comes pre configured with the Distribution 500 and Battery Connection Kit installed In this section the rectifiers are added and the system is powered up and will go through a self test At this point see Chapter 5 Configuring and Operating the Candeo Power System in the user manual UM6C75 End of Job Routines and Turnover This section covers end of job routines such as designating circuits numbering frames installing the top cover optional doors and turn over to the customer Small Candeo 1 Preparation Overview tools and test equipment precautions and receiving materials Locating the system Mounting the power system shelves in existing facilities and bridging the supplementary distribution panel if furnished to the initial distribution panel Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 112 of 436 Installing DC power 3 Cabling and connecting Basic rules specifications for connecting lugs torque values for bolted lug to bus bar connections cabling layouts and procedures for cabling and connecting the ground leads AC supplies for the rectifiers DC load cables miscellaneous cables and final connections at
273. the power connector to the pedestal see Figure 115 Note You must press a latch trip on the front and rear of the plug You may need to use a screwdriver blade against the latch trip on the front of the plug b Disconnect the system monitor connector to the pedestal see Figure 115 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 350 of 436 Adding a module to a column Figure 115 NT7DO9CA Pedestal module power and system monitor connections System monitor connector NT8D46CB cable T Power plug J1 m D Z CAUTION i y DISCONNECT FROM SOURCE OF DC POWER BEFORE REMOVING THIS UNIT D FROM THE PEDESTAL gfi 553 5469 c Use a 9 16 in socket wrench to remove the five mounting bolts that secure the module see Figure 116 and lift it off the column NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Adding a module to a column Page 351 of 436 Figure 116 Module mounting bolts ee Mounting bolts 553 3057 Note There is an EMI shield it looks like a brass grill on the top of each pedestal Leave this shield on the pedestal Use a few pieces of tape to hold the shield in position so the holes for the mounting bolts are aligned with the screw holes on the pedestal After the module is secured remove as much of the tape as possible 4 Position and secure modules a Locate the positioning guides on the
274. ting a terminal to a COM pott 2 cc2scccteceesacdnaans 178 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 8 of 436 Contents Connecting a switch box and terminal to COM and COM pots ci lt s4s cceaeede een ve gee d nes Wareews 179 Connecting a switch box and terminal to SD aad COM Panes os cc beta eeudsehGueiedededien auads 181 Contiectitg amodem s 1 lt 25s civaesesaosvngesrees EEES Er 182 CONDIPINING A modem 5 c055 6 c2sie andes dnbea gd d irarri 184 Connecting a modem to an SDI port s cscdsssvenvaearvaves 185 Connecting a modem to switch box COM ports SDI ports 187 Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system 20022eeee eee 191 COMMS cc dike soins pene EEA EENT E E E 191 Cabling uidehnes 6a kes cccdiiveet chee leer siseagi ages ions 191 Cote Net MOUS csi ct ohh ed oebeh adda deebyehigkwdder REER 193 E apune Te LOG SUE sighs bad be oddaeiaakt eestewedbiead nes 197 Cabling te VO papel csscrcdandiartaueortewsi i estki 199 Cabling the Network SING ise cag dcpiaesdbuneee Siacecurbageads 201 Configuring and cabling the Clock Controllers 202 Network Group 0 Shelf 0 to Shelf 1 csrsricsenitisreiriredess 203 Connecting the 3PE faceplates in the Core Net modules 203 Inspecting CNI to 3PE factory installed cables 2 02 2000 25 204 Connecting the Core Net backplanes 2 00 206 Options the System Utility Cards 3ccso sas ceawereansieeiaas 207
275. tion description of the system equipment applications and configurations 2 Specifications 3 Functional description 4 Configuring and operating the system 5 Communicating with the System Manager SP 6 Maintenance routine maintenance troubleshooting replacement and addition of components 7 Recommended replacement parts 8 List of terms 9 Technical service assistance Safety ground protective earth and logic return wiring To ensure electrical system grounding integrity follow the isolated ground topology for all Meridian 1 Succession 1000M Large System equipment implementations Isolated ground provides the best method for avoiding the introduction of ground noise to the system from other external equipment When isolated ground topology is not possible an alternative grounding method may be used if it provides the required Meridian 1 Succession Single Point Ground SPG reference The SPG source must be the AC Equipment Ground ACEG bus located inside the Meridian 1 Succession service panel Service panel grounding facilities must be properly referenced to an acceptable AC grounding source which provides a low noise low impedance path Installations that have elected not to deploy an isolated ground methodology will be noted during Avaya system audits Locations experiencing system operational performance difficulties attributed to ground noise or improper grounding methods will be required to rectify the issue
276. to I O connector panel routing Right I O Connector Panel Left I O Connector Panel I O Panel a lll m n This side uses left I O Connector Panel This side uses right I O Connector Panel 553 7496 As space permits cables can be routed 1 Horizontally in the cable troughs at the front rear and sides of the module Note In a DC powered module because there is no MPDU there is room to route cables horizontally from front to rear on the left side front view of the module NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Preparing for installation Page 61 of 436 2 Vertically on the sides of the module 3 Vertically in the corner channels in the rear of the module shielded cables only CAUTION Service Interruption Damage to Equipment Cables must be routed as perpendicular as possible to any nearby power cables Avoid routing cables near power cables if alternate routing is available At the rear of the module cables routed between the I O panel and the rear cover can be parallel to the power cables because the panel provides EMI shielding Avaya recommends that you use the 90 connector end of the cable to route the cable through a module or cabinet instead of the 180 end since some openings are small see Figures 15 and 16 Furthermore Avaya recommends that you route cables top to bottom so gravity will ease installation Figure 15 90 cable connector 553 7497 Large System Installatio
277. to OFF If there is an MPDU in the module use the associated circuit breaker on the MPDU If there is a switch on the power supply use the switch e The green LED on the power supply should go out e The red column LED should light e The system terminal should display PWRO002 and BSDO90 Note If the power supply is in an IPE Module XMI messages may be generated e The system terminal should then display BSDOOO 3 Set the power supply to ON e The green LED on the power supply should light e The red column LED should go out e The system terminal should display PWROOOO NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Performing acceptance tests Page 321 of 436 4 Set the power supply to OFF Wait until the red column LED lights then unseat the power supply e The red column LED should remain lit e The system terminal should display PWRO002 and PWROOO3 5 Make sure the power supply switch is OFF and then push it back into the slot Set the power supply to ON e The green LED on the power supply should light e The red column LED should go out e The system terminal should display PWROOO0 End of Procedure Testing the blower unit and thermal sensor Use this procedure to test the NT8D52 Blower Unit and its interface to the system monitor This test should be performed on the blower unit when a column is initially installed Procedure 53 Testing blower unit and thermal sensor IMPORTANT In the steps below if you fail
278. to see an expected display code contact your Avaya support representative 1 Inthe front of the pedestal set the blower unit circuit breaker or power switch to OFF e The red LED at the top front of the column should light Note Some DC powered blower units such as the NT8D52DD may also display PWROO05 2 Set the blower unit circuit breaker or power switch to ON e The column LED should go out e The system terminal should display PWRO0046 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 322 of 436 Performing acceptance tests 3 Use a screwdriver to loosen the retaining screws at the front of the blower unit see Figure 107 on page 323 and pull the unit out until it is disconnected from the pedestal Note Do not pull the unit all the way out of the pedestal e The column LED should light Reinstall the blower unit and tighten the retaining screws e The column LED should go out e The system terminal should display PWRO046 Heat one of the two thermal sensors under the top cap of the column with a hand held hair dryer or similar heat source e The column LED should light e Thirty seconds after the thermal sensor detects 70 degrees C 158 degrees F the main circuit breaker or the blower unit circuit breaker at the rear of the pedestal should trip The system terminal should display PWRO0004 PWROO006 and PWROO007 Allow the sensor to cool then reset the circuit breaker in the pedestal If a sysload
279. tom of the page and select Contact Avaya Support Page 4 of 436 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 5 of 436 Contents Comens raare inn el ee ee en ev eeee EEA 5 New in this release 000 cece eens 13 Festes erona nee a Ware Sea ed Slee ere Reese eee 13 O i e EEEE EEE E E EE E EE S A dab eR SE E E A T E E 13 List of Procedures 00 0c eee eens 17 Customer service 002 cece eens 25 System information 000020 eee ees 27 SUBGCL coins come on sits pei thesteee enn eerosecarse ees 2I Applicable syiar ERRER 28 WieNHed AUMENCE aorar tar a a ea Te 29 CEMO enee eea aaa e eeN 30 Related mformatiOn ack 6 4 bok 6 0 4 BG FE HERISM ELSA Re 31 UNCON hoc ice ceun ce ee dew wen enabenacns 33 COMES seeds ce re HH GRD A KARE E RAS ERR RG ER ASR EARS 33 CVI oh nh oe Rea ks Hd eden sees gees tess 33 Upgrade and New Install Wizards csiisereriiecericorriteivi 34 Avaya Communication Server 1000 task flow 34 Summary Oi pro edures os kceai crnd rekon EEV ERES EEE ENEA 37 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 6 of 436 Contents Preparing for installation 0085 COMICS Gonder ee Leute Reed teehee Gena em anes Reguuemieiis 2 ia pee iee gaan eaed Ceebaee del Red EREA System equipment UEMS os ccs paw itecauseeweewabsawawdey a SUSIE PPR 69 bused Meee ke LETS GI KGS ORES TED Cable routing guidelines 00 64 2sn0r acres aren erred eo ke wd es Equipment
280. tor 157 BELLCORE specification 328 Black Box ABCDE Switches modem connections 188 system terminal connections 181 blower units acceptance tests 321 bracing rods 335 339 BSD messages in acceptance tests module power supply 320 bypass switches UPS 93 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 430 of 436 Index C cables and cabling fourth modules 72 lines and trunks 245 module additions 352 353 355 363 364 network loops 367 PFTU 152 routing guidelines 58 superloops 380 system monitors 161 cable tray kits 81 cabling system monitor 161 CALIFORNIA OSHPD specification 328 call back modems 183 Candeo DC power systems 97 captive screws 67 card allocations Krone cross connect system 142 casters 75 CC clock controller cards superloop cabling 380 384 385 CE PE Common Equipment Peripheral Equipment line pair termination tables 251 CE PE Common Equipment Peripheral Equipment backplane slots 142 trunk pair termination tables 251 circuit breakers DC power 122 125 module additions 349 352 354 358 366 circuit cards 63 column height recommendations for modules 57 columns 42 adding modules to 347 fourth modules on 69 module additions 358 configuring system monitors 155 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 connectors 245 covers module 66 CP call processing cards sysloads 323 system terminal connections 176 CPIO ports mod
281. tors B F L S I O panel connectors F L Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 10 Slot 14 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 271 of 436 Table 48 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M 2 Wire Type 1 trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors C G M T I O panel connectors G M Slot 10 Slot 14 Slot 11 Slot 15 Slot 11 Slot 15 Slot 11 Slot 15 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 272 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 49 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M 2 Wire Paging trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors A E K R I O panel connectors E K Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 12 NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Cabling lines andtrunks Page 273 of 436 Table 50 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M 2 Wire Paging trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors B F L S I O panel connectors F L Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 10 Slot 14 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 274 of 436 Cabling lines and trunks Table 51 NT5K19 Flexible E amp M 2 Wire Paging trunk connections for NT8D37 I O panel connectors C G M T I O panel connectors G M Slot 14 Slot 10 Slot 14 Slot 11 Slot 11 Slot 15 Slot 15 Slot 11 NN43021 310 S
282. tray kits Installing AC power Installing DC power Planning and designating a Main Distribution Frame Installing Power Failure Transfer Units Configuring the system monitor Connecting a system terminal or modem Cabling Common Equipment in a Single Group system Cabling Common Equipment in a Multi Group system Cabling network modules and loops Cabling lines and trunks Powering up the system and initial loading Performing acceptance tests Installing earthquake bracing Adding a module to a column Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 40 of 436 Introduction NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Page 41 of 436 Preparing for installation Contents This chapter contains information about the following topics Requrenie aioe eetse bees ted osesseaseatcaaseage een sees 41 Syst m equipment UEMS rerit ro ririn iiar ir eiie kenia 42 Syste OPONE eer rieir irotan ee ee ee ee er 49 Cable routing guidelines scere yi ceed ecenndiwssedeodseneions 58 Equipment handling precauiigns 54csrciendaiadies asieaventes 62 Preparing the equipment for installation 66 Requirements WARNING Before a Large System can be installed a network assessment must be performed and the network must be VolIP ready If the minimum VoIP network requirements are not met the system will not operate properly For information about the minimum VoIP network
283. twork groups These systems support up to eight network groups as shown in Figure 4 on page 46 Fiber Network Fabric provides complete non blocking communication between the network groups eliminating busy signals for network blocked calls between groups Figure 8 on page 51 shows a multi group system with four network modules If the ceiling height is too low for the four tier column a three tier column can be used as shown in Figure 9 on page 52 Figure 8 Four tier multi group system mM IPE IPE e l NET NET UEM NET NET IPE Core 1 Core 0 IPE 553 AAA1242 Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 52 of 436 Preparing for installation Figure 9 Three tier multi group system j J NET NET IPE UEM NET NET IPE IPE Core 1 Core 0 IPE IPE _ gt l 553 AAA1243 CP PIV The Call Processor Pentium IV CP PIV Large System processor contains the following features e a PCI based design that is compatible with current architecture e an Intel Pentium 4 processor e two Compact Flash CF sockets one on board and one hot swappable on the faceplate The on board CF is referred to as the Fixed Media Disk FMD and the f
284. used in hardrock concrete as long as the compressive strength exceeds 20 7 MPa 3000 psi Only Kit A can be used in lightweight aggregate concrete with a compressive strength greater than 27 6 MPa 4000 psi The floor parameters for your installation can usually be found in the engineering building drawings Table 60 Seismic Anchor Kit Seismic Concrete Anchor Kit BEEheore thk min NT8D64BE NT8D64CE The kits listed in Table 60 on page 330 contain commercially available mounting hardware You have the option of purchasing the contents directly from the manufacturer using the listing below or ordering the kits directly from Avaya e Kit A NT8D64BE contains four of each of the following items Hilti HDI 3 4 in box of 25 manufacturer part 457564 Hilti Corporation 918 252 6000 or Multi Set II manufacturer part RM 34 ITW Ramset Redhead Incorporated 219 874 4217 Hex head bolt 3 4 in 10 x 1 50 long steel material zinc plate finish NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing earthquake bracing Page 331 of 436 Flat washer internal diameter 0 812 outside diameter 1 469 thickness 0 120 steel material zinc plate finish Kit B NT8D64CF contains four of the following items Hilti HSL M16 25 box of 10 manufacturer part 665934 Hilti Corporation 918 252 6000 Finally to aid installation four kits have been developed The seismic anc
285. ut zshanging CHOS VVU Censu ccm 10 Figure 165 appears Press y to reset CMOS to factory defaults Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 426 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Figure 165 CP PM BIOS reset jystem EIS Setuy Utility v5 3 sereral Scttvare Ine All right reserved Bazic CMOS Configuration Feetures Contiguration 0S to factory defaults Y N 1 et CHOS to last known values HOS to factory defaulte Writ to CH S and Exit Exit without changing CHOS gt select lt Eec Vow Gensu com 11 The system reboots After the initial boot Figure 162 appears and the new BIOS version displays Verify the BIOS version is 18 You can now press the F key to boot from the faceplate CF card and proceed with the Linux Platform Base software installation End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing a Signaling Server Page 427 of 436 Installing the CS 1000 Linux Base You must install CS 1000 Linux Base if your Signaling Server is not running the latest CS 1000 Linux Base software release The CP PM Linux upgrade kit contains a hard drive with CS 1000 Linux Base preloaded You can install CS 1000 Linux Base from the command line interface CLD using a bootable CF card on CP PM and using a bootable optical disk on COTS Configure the ELAN TLAN IP address Gateway subnet masks date and time settings during the CS 1000 Linux Base installation For information ab
286. warning tag on the connection at the ground source The warning tag should read WARNING TELEPHONE SYSTEM GROUND CONNECTION DO NOT DISCONNECT Using a volt ohm meter measure the resistance between the ground pin on the power plug and the ground terminal on the power outlet The resistance should be 0 ohms If the resistance is greater than 0 5 ohms check the power outlet ground and safety ground protective earth connections Remove the PDU field wiring access plate Connect the logic return wire Starting at the LRE connect a 8 AWG wire and route it to the column and up or down the I O channel area as appropriate Then route the wire through the conduit hole in the pedestal to LRTN on the field wiring block see Figure 33 Figure 33 Logic return connection for each column MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER 553 8996 10 Replace the PDU field wiring access plate End of Procedure NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing AC power Installing UPS ground cabling Page 93 of 436 Use the manufacturer s documents to install and cable a UPS If the UPS does not contain an integral bypass switch add one externally during initial UPS wiring Figure 34 is a block diagram of a UPS installation and associated wiring Follow Procedure 6 to install UPS ground cabling Note Because UPS installation can be complex Avaya recommends that installers attend vendor training programs Figure 34 AC reserv
287. wer alarm information and data signals e built in temperature compensation e built in charge current limiting e EMI FCC class B or CISPR class B for systems up to 1000 A 50 kW Note 1 The Candeo DC power plant is considered external power equipment because it is not housed in Large System columns Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 100 of 436 Installing DC power Note 2 The Large Candeo system generally requires one input receptacle for each rectifier within 1 8 m 6 ft of each rectifier The commercial power receptacles required are determined by the number and type of rectifiers used Note 3 The Small Candeo system requires two 30 A feeds for each rectifier shelf with each shelf supporting five or six rectifiers In a single frame configuration a Candeo system can power a complete range of medium sized applications Large Candeo Built around the shelfless Candeo Rectifier 50 48 this system operates from any voltage between 80 V AC to 300 V AC single phase When configured with 50 A Candeo rectifiers the system delivers up to 500 A from a single 1 05 m 42 in frame and up to 1000 A from a single 2 1 m 84 in frame Small Candeo Built around the Candeo Rectifier 30 48 this system operates from any voltage between 75 V AC to 310 V AC single phase When configured with 30 A Candeo rectifiers the system delivers up to 150 A from a single rectifier shelf and up to 300 A from a system equipped w
288. wer from the power plant to the PDU Note 1 Itis good installation practice to fully wire out a pedestal even if only one or two columns are being installed at first This facilitates future expansion to a four module column The number of wires depends on whether the requirements are for two feeds per column standard four feeds per column enhanced reliability or one feed per Common Equipment CE module Note 2 If only two modules are used in the column set the CB2 and CB3 circuit breakers to OFF Procedure 9 Connecting power from the power plant to the PDU NT4N49AA 1 2 Ensure that power to the power plant is removed from the service panel Remove the air intake grill from the rear of the column pedestal being wired by removing the two screws securing the air intake grill to the pedestal Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the PDU safety cover Remove the top cover from the power plant a Remove the six screws from the top of the power plant b Release the captive screw on the front control panel c Lay the control panel down and remove the top cover Route the wires between the power plant and the pedestal of the column being wired For installations that use a junction box a Insert the conduit from the junction box into one of the conduit access holes in the pedestal b Route the wires within the cable tie saddles and under the cable restraint bar at the base of the pedestal Large System Installation
289. with a capacity of 50 8 Ah They are available in battery modules containing four batteries each A0669283 Battery Module Install the modules in the N0003344 Battery Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 108 of 436 Installing DC power Enclosure an enclosed shelf for use in Candeo racks Each battery shelf can accommodate two modules for a total of eight batteries Small Candeo sample configurations Example configuration 1 A basic 120 A system see Figure 36 on page 108 e initial power shelf equipped with a System Manager SP and five 1500 W rectifiers N 1 e initial distribution and battery connection panel with 18 plug in positions for load protection devices and eight positions for battery protection devices Figure 36 Basic 120 A Small Candeo configuration NN43021 310 Standard 06 01 March 2013 Installing DC power Page 109 of 436 Example configuration 2 A 300 A system e initial power shelf equipped with a System Manager SP and five 1500 W rectifiers e supplementary power shelf equipped with six rectifiers e initial distribution and battery connection panel with 18 plug in positions for load protection devices and eight positions for battery protection devices Example configuration 3 A 300 A system see Figure 37 on page 110 e initial power shelf equipped with a System Manager SP and five 1500 W rectifiers e supplementary power shelf equipped with six rectifiers e initial distribut
290. you plug the IBM COTS server into an AC surge suppressor Figure 155 shows the rear view of the IBM X306m server Figure 155 IBM X306m rear view Ethernet speed LED USB ports Ethernet Tx Rx activity LED igabit Etheme Port 2 ELAN Figure 156 shows the rear view of the IBM x3350 server Figure 156 IBM x3350 rear view PORT1 porT2 ELAN TLAN Gigabit Fast Ethernet Slot USB Serial Video Slot2 Empty Redundant Hot Swap Power Ethernet Ports Port for BMC Ports Port Port Power Supply Bay Supply and Fan Large System Installation and Commissioning Page 412 of 436 Installing a Signaling Server Note When you perform Procedure 75 Connecting an IBM COTS server on page 412 see Figure 155 or Figure 156 Procedure 75 Connecting an IBM COTS server 1 Connect the IBM server to the TLAN subnet Insert the RJ 45 CAT5 or better cable into the TLAN Ethernet port on the back of the server Insert the other end of the cable into the TLAN subnet of the Layer 2 switch Connect the IBM server to the ELAN subnet Insert the RJ 45 CAT5 or better cable into the ELAN Ethernet port on the back of the server Insert the other end of the cable into the ELAN subnet of the Layer 2 switch Connect a DTE DTE null modem serial cable from the serial port on the back of the server to the serial port on a maintenance terminal The IBM x3350 requires a NTRX26NPE6 9 pin female to 9 pin female null modem cable Connect the IBM serv

File - Performance Communications

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents